Interior Renovations (Computer Lab and PTA) Morton Collegebidroom.net/poulos/mtcl0312/Specifications/13-004 spec... · 2013-03-04 · project manual Interior Renovations (Computer

project manual

Interior Renovations (Computer Lab and PTA) for

Morton College 3801 S. Central Avenue Cicero, IL 60804

125 N. Halsted Street, Suite 301 Chicago, Illinois 60661 P 312.496.0000 F 312.496.0001 Project Number: 13-004 February 20, 2013

MORTON COLLEGE TABLE OF CONTENTS Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 2

DIVISION...... SECTION TITLE .................................................................................................................... PAGES SERIES 0 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT FORMS 00030 ........... Advertisement for Bids ........................................................................................................... 1 00200 ........... Instructions to Bidders ........................................................................................................... 5 00300 ........... Bid Form ................................................................................................................................. 3 00410 ........... Bid Bond ................................................................................................................................. 1 00440 ........... Substitution Sheet .................................................................................................................. 1 00485…….….Certificate of Compliance with Illinois Drug-Free Workplace……………………………….. .. 1 00487…….….Certificate of Compliance with Illinois Human Rights Act……………...……………………… 1 00488…….….Certificate Regarding Criminal Background Investigations…………...………………………. 1 00489…….….Authorization for Criminal Background Investigation…………………………………………… 1 00495 ........... Bidder Eligibility Certification and Non-Collusion Affidavit ..................................................... 1 00700 ........... General Conditions of the Construction Contract .................................................................. 53 00820 ........... Prevailing Wage Requirements ............................................................................................. 8 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENT 01100 ........... Summary ................................................................................................................................ 4 01230…….….Alternates………………………………………………………………………………………….. . 1 01260…….….Contract Modification Procedures ......................................................................................... 3 01270…….….Unit Prices………………………………………………………………………………………… .. 2 01290 ........... Payment Procedures ............................................................................................................. 5 01310 ........... Project Management and Coordination ................................................................................. 7 01320 ........... Construction Progress Documentation .................................................................................. 5 01330 ........... Submittal Procedures ............................................................................................................. 8 01400…….….Quality Requirements…………………………………………………………...…………………. 5 01420 ........... References ............................................................................................................................. 2 01600 ........... Product Requirements ........................................................................................................... 6 01732 ........... Selective Demolition .............................................................................................................. 4 01770 ........... Closeout Procedures ............................................................................................................. 3 01783 ........... Project Record Documents .................................................................................................... 2 DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS 06105 ........... Miscellaneous Carpentry ....................................................................................................... 7 06412 ........... Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets ..................................................................... 6 06417 ........... Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops ....................................................................................... 4 DIVISION 7 –THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07920 ........... Joint Sealants ........................................................................................................................ 6 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09111 ........... Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing .......................................................................................... 6 09250……… Gypsum Board……………………………………………………………………………………… 6 09511 ........... Acoustical Panel Ceilings ....................................................................................................... 7 09651 ........... Resilient Floor Tile ................................................................................................................. 4 09652 ........... Resilient Sheet Flooring ......................................................................................................... 4 09653 ........... Resilient Wall Base and Accessories .................................................................................... 4 09681 ........... Carpet Tile .............................................................................................................................. 4 09912 ........... Interior Painting ...................................................................................................................... 5 DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10101 ........... Visual Display Boards ............................................................................................................ 6 10651 ........... Operable Panel Partitions ...................................................................................................... 7

MORTON COLLEGE TABLE OF CONTENTS Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 2 of 2

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 12494 ........... Roller Shades ........................................................................................................................ 5 DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL 15010 ........... Basic Mechanical Requirements ........................................................................................... 9 15060 ........... Mechanical Demolition for Remodeling ................................................................................. 3 15290 ........... Ductwork Insulation ................................................................................................................ 4 15440 ........... Plumbing Fixtures .................................................................................................................. 2 15835 ........... Terminal Heat Transfer Units ................................................................................................. 2 15890 ........... Ductwork ................................................................................................................................ 8 15910 ........... Ductwork Accessories ............................................................................................................ 1 15936 ........... Air Inlets and Outlets .............................................................................................................. 2 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 ........... Basic Electrical Requirements ............................................................................................... 14 16060 ........... Electrical Demolition for Remodeling ..................................................................................... 3 16080 ........... Through Penetration Firestopping ......................................................................................... 5 16111 ........... Conduit and Boxes ................................................................................................................. 9 16120 ........... Wire and Cable ...................................................................................................................... 3 16141 ........... Wiring Devices ....................................................................................................................... 2 16195 ........... Electrical Identification ........................................................................................................... 4 16510 ........... Lighting ................................................................................................................................... 4 16570 ........... Lighting Control Systems ....................................................................................................... 4 16721 ........... Fire Alarm and Detection Systems ........................................................................................ 6 DIVISION 17 - TECHNOLOGY 17010 ........... Basic Communications Systems Requirements .................................................................... 19 17060 ........... Technology Demolition for Remodeling ................................................................................. 3 17080 ........... Through Penetration Firestopping ......................................................................................... 6 17110 ........... Communication Equipment Rooms ....................................................................................... 3 17130 ........... Interior Communication Pathways ......................................................................................... 3 17160 ........... Horizontal Cabling Requirements .......................................................................................... 5 17170 ........... Identification and Administration ............................................................................................ 3 17171 ........... Testing ................................................................................................................................... 4

SECTION 00030 – ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

BID INFORMATION1.1

Sealed Bids will be received by the Board of Trustees, Morton College, on Tuesday,A.March 12, 2013 at 11:00 am, prevailing time for the Interior Renovations at MortonCollege.

Lump sum bid proposals will be received for this project at the scheduled time of receiptB.of bids and will be publicly opened at that time.

Bid security in the form of a bid bond, certified check, or cash in an amount equal to 10C.percent of the base bid amount shall be submitted with the bid. Should a bid bond besubmitted, the bid bond shall be payable to the Board of Trustees, Morton College.

Bids shall be submitted on or before the specified closing time in an opaque sealedD.envelope addressed to: Mr. John Potempa, 3801 South Central Avenue, Building D,Room D101, Cicero, Illinois 60804.

A Pre-Bid Meeting will be held on Wednesday, February 27, 2013, at 1:30 pm in RoomE.D101, Morton College, 3801 South Central Avenue, Cicero, Illinois 60804.Representatives from the College and the Architect’s office will be present to answerquestions regarding bidding procedures and project requirements.

The Board of Trustees reserves the right to reject any or all bids or parts thereof, orF.waive any irregularities or informalities, and to make the award in the best interest of theCollege.

All bidders must comply with applicable Illinois Law requiring the payment of prevailingG.wages by all contractors working on public projects. Bidders must comply with the IllinoisStatutory requirements regarding labor, including Equal Employment Opportunity Laws.

BID DEPOSIT1.2

Bidding documents are on file and may be obtained upon receipt of a refundable depositA.in the amount of $100.00 for one set of bidding documents consisting of two sets of plansand one Project Manual from:

Cross Rhodes Repro, 30 Eisenhower Lane North, Lombard, Illinois 60148.B.Phone: 630.963.4700 Fax: 630.598.0317

MORTON COLLEGEComputer Lab and PTA RenovationsDKA Project No.: 13-004

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDSSection 00030

Page 1 of 1

SECTION 00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

Sealed proposals are invited for Campus-Wide Security Upgrades at Morton College pursuant tospecifications. Vendors who do not submit a bid or who do not respond with a "no bid" will be removedfrom our vendor list for this item.

PROPOSALS:1.1

Proposals will be received and publicly read aloud by Morton College District 527 at theA.place, date, and time hereinafter designated. You are invited to be present if you sodesire.

PLACE: Morton College District #5271.2Physical Plant Office, Building D, Room D1013801 South Central AvenueCicero, IL 60807-4398

DATE: Tuesday, March 12, 20131.3

TIME: 11:00 AM FAXES ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE1.4

Proposals received after this time will not be accepted.A.

Proposals must be made in accordance with the instructions contained herein. TheyB.shall be submitted on the forms furnished by the College in a sealed envelope, plainlymarked, with the Bidder's Name and Address and the notation:

BID: Interior Renovations at Morton College1.5

DELIVERY:1.6

All prices must be quoted F.O.B., Morton College, 3801 South Central Avenue, Cicero, ILA.60804-4398, unless otherwise noted.

TAX EXEMPTION:1.7

Morton College District #527 is exempt from Federal, State, and Municipal taxes.A.

SIGNATURE ON BIDS:1.8

Morton College District #527 requires the signature on bid documents to be that of anA.authorized representative of said company.

Each bidder, by making his bid, represents that he has read and understands the biddingB.documents and that these instructions to bidders are a part of the specifications.


INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERSSection 00200

Page 1 of 5

BIDDING PROCEDURES:1.9

No bid shall be modified, withdrawn, or cancelled for sixty (60) days after the bid openingA.date without the consent of the College Board of Trustees.

Changes or corrections may be made in the bid documents after they have been issuedB.and before bids are received. In such case, a written addendum describing the changeor correction will be issued by the College to all bidders of record. Such addendum shalltake precedence over that portion of the documents concerned, and shall become part ofthe bid documents. Except in unusual cases, addendum will be issued to reach thebidders at least five (5) days prior to date established for receipt of bids.

Each bidder shall carefully examine all bid documents and all addenda thereto, and shallC.thoroughly familiarize themselves with the detailed requirements thereof prior tosubmitting a proposal. Should a bidder find discrepancies or ambiguities in, or omissionsfrom documents, or should they be in doubt as to their meaning, they shall, at once, andin any event, not later than ten (10) days prior to bid due date, notify the College who will,if necessary, send written addendum to all bidders. The college will not be responsiblefor any oral instructions. After bids are received, no allowance will be made for oversightby bidder.

SITE EXAMINATION:1.10

Bidder shall examine the project site before submitting a bid.A.

A Pre-Bid Meeting will be held on Wednesday, February 27, 2013, at 1:30 pm in RoomB.D101, Morton College, 3801 South Central Avenue, Cicero, Illinois 60804.Representatives from the College and the Architect’s office will be present to answerquestions regarding bidding procedures and project requirements.

A visit to the project site may be arranged for Bidders by contacting Mr. John Potempa,C.Director of Facilities for the College at 708.656.8000.

SUBSTITUTIONS:1.11

Each bidder represents that his bid is based upon the materials and equipment describedA.in the bidding documents.

Any dealer bidding an equal product must specify brand name, model number, andB.supply specifications of product. The Board shall be the sole judge of whether an articleshall be deemed to be equal.

A bidder's failure to meet the minimum specifications as listed may result inC.disqualification of his bid.

REJECTION OF BIDS:1.12

The bidder acknowledges the right of the College Board to reject any or all proposals andA.to waive informality or irregularity in any proposal received and to award each item to



Page 2 of 5

different bidders or all items to a single bidder. In addition, the bidder recognizes theright of the College Board to reject a proposal if the proposal is in any way incomplete orirregular. The College Board may also award, at its discretion, only certain items quotedon. The College Board also reserves the right to reject the proposal of a Bidder who haspreviously failed to perform properly or complete on time contracts of a similar nature, ora bid of a Bidder when investigation shows that Bidder is not in a position to perform thecontract.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDA1.13

Signature of company official on original document shall be construed asA.acknowledgement of receipt of any and all addenda pertaining to this specific proposal.Identification by number of addenda and date issued should be noted on all proposalssubmitted.

FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON PROPOSAL SUBMITTEDB.MAY RESULT IN DISQUALIFICATION OF PROPOSAL.

BID SECURITY:1.14

A certified check or bank draft or bid bond, made payable to Morton College DistrictA.#527, Cook County, Illinois, shall be submitted with the bid in the amount of ten (10)percent of your total bid. The bid security will be forfeited by the successful bidder in theevent of the bidders failure to enter into a contract. Checks or drafts of unsuccessfulbidders will be returned as soon as practicable after opening and checking the bids.

INSURANCE:1.15

The successful bidder will be required to furnish a certificate of insurance in accordanceA.with the General Conditions.

PERFORMANCE BONDS:1.16

The successful bidder on this proposal must furnish a performance bond and a labor andA.material payment bond made out to Morton College District #527, prepared on anapproved form, as security for the faithful performance of their contract, within ten (10)days of their notification that their bid has been accepted. The surety thereon must besuch surety company or companies as are authorized and licensed to transact businessin the State of Illinois and have an A-XIV best rating. Attorneys in fact who sign bidbonds must file with each bond a certified copy of their power of attorney to sign saidbonds. The performance bond and labor and material payment bond shall be in anamount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract sum. Such bonds shall bein force from the date of signing of the contract until one year after issuing of finalcertificate of payment. The cost of the bonds shall be included in the bidder’s proposal.



Page 3 of 5

LAWS AND ORDINANCES:1.17

In execution of the work, the Contractor shall comply with applicable state and local laws,A.ordinances and regulation, the rules and regulations of the Board of Fire Underwriters,and OSHA standards.

DAMAGE AND NEGLIGENCE:1.18

The Contractor agrees to indemnify and save harmless the College and employees fromA.and against all loss, including costs and attorney’s fees, by reasons or liability imposedby law upon the College for damages because of bodily injury, including death at anytime resulting there from, sustained by any person or persons or on account of damageto property including loss of use thereof as provided in the General Conditions andSupplementary Conditions.

College shall not be responsible for damages, delays, or failure to perform on its partB.resulting from acts or occurrences of force majeure. “Force majeure” means any (a) actof God, landslide, lightning, earthquake, hurricane, tornado, blizzard, floods and otheradverse and inclement weather conditions; (b) fire, explosion, flood, acts of a publicenemy, war, blockade, insurrection, riot or civil disturbance; (c) labor dispute, strike, workslow down, picketing, primary boycotts, secondary boycotts or boycotts of any kind andnature, or work stoppages; (d) any law, order, regulation ordinance, or requirement ofany government or legal body or any representative of any such government or legalbody; (e) inability to secure necessary materials, equipment, parts or other componentsof the project as a result of transportation difficulties, fuel or energy shortages, or acts oromission of any common carriers; or (f) any other similar cause or similar event beyondthe reasonable control of College.

INVESTIGATION OF BIDDERS:1.19

The College will make any necessary investigation to determine the ability of the bidderA.to fulfill the proposal requirements. Morton College reserves the right to reject anyproposal if it is determined that the bidder is not properly qualified to carry out theobligation of the contract.

SUBCONTRACTORS:1.20

Bidders must state on the proposal form all subcontractors he intends to use for thisA.project. Failure to do so may be cause for rejection of bid.

PREVAILING WAGE RATE:1.21

The successful bidder must pay not less than the prevailing hourly wage rate determinedA.by the Illinois Department of Labor for the county where the contract is executed and thecraft or type of worker needed to execute the contract. See the prevailing wage scaleattached.



Page 4 of 5

If, during the course of work under this contract, the Department of Labor revises theB.prevailing rate hourly wages to be paid under this contract for any trade or occupation,Owner, will notify Contractor and each Subcontractor of the changes in the prevailing rateof hourly wages. Contractor shall have the sole responsibility and duty to ensure that therevised prevailing rate of hourly wages is paid by contractor and all Subcontractors toeach worker to whom a revised rate is applicable. Revisions to the prevailing wage asset forth above shall not result in an increase in the Contract Sum.

OTHER:1.22

This contract is subject to and governed by the rules and regulations of the IllinoisA.Human Rights Act. The Customer reserves the right to request additional informationafter your proposal has been submitted.

BID QUANTITIES:1.23

The College Board will reserve the right to increase or decrease, within reasonable limits,A.such quantities as need requires and at the unit price stated.

BID AWARDS:1.24

The successful contractor, and/or any contractor shall not proceed on this bid until itA.receives a purchase order from the college. Failure to comply is the risk of thatcontractor.

END OF SECTION 00200



Page 5 of 5

SECTION 00300 - BID FORM

To: Morton College3801 South Central AvenueCicero, IL 60804

Project: Interior Renovations

Date: __________________________

Submitted by:

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________(full name and address)

OFFERPART 1 -

Having examined the site and having familiarized itself with the conditions affecting the cost of the workassociated with the Campus-Wide Security Upgrades and with the bidding documents, Bidder herbyproposes to perform everything required and to furnish all labor, materials, necessary tools, expendableequipment and transportation services necessary to complete in a workmanlike manner the subdivision ofwork stated above in accordance with the bidding documents for the following sums:

Base Bid:

We have included herewith the Security Deposit as required by the Instructions to Bidders.

All federal taxes, State of Illinois taxes, and local municipal taxes as applicable are included in the BidSum. The Bidder agrees to perform the work for the lump sum amount of:

TOTAL BASE BID $ _________________________________________________________ (in figures)

___________________________________________________________________________ (in words)

Alternate Bids:

The undersigned hereby states the net amount of increase to the Lump Sum Base Bid for the followingAlternates as described in Section 12300.

Alternate No. 1: State the amount to be added to the Lump Sum Base Bid for providing new plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets and countertop at Room 355C. TOTAL ALTERNATE NO. 1 $___________________________________________________________

Alternate No. 2: State the amount to be deducted from the Lump Sum Base Bid for eliminating all workassociated with the Computer Labs at Building B.

TOTAL ALTERNATE NO. 2 $___________________________________________________________


BID FORMSection 00300

Page 1 of 3

Alternate No. 3: State the amount to be deducted from the Lump Sum Base Bid for eliminating all workassociated with the PTA Classroom at Building C.


Alternate No. 4: State the amount to be deducted from the Lump Sum Base Bid for eliminating theLiquidated Damages Clause.


ACCEPTANCEPART 2 -

This offer shall be open to acceptance and is irrevocable for ninety (90) days from the Bid closing date.

If the bid is accepted by the Owner within the time period stated above, we will:

Execute the Agreement within ten (10) days of receipt of Notice of Award.A.

Furnish the required bonds within ten (10) days of receipt of Notice of Award in the formB.described in the Supplementary Conditions.

Furnish the required Certificate of Insurance within ten (10) days of receipt of Notice ofC.Award in the form and amounts described in the Supplementary Conditions.

Commence work as established by the written Notice to Proceed.D.

If this Bid is accepted within the time stated, and we fail to commence the Work or we fail to provide therequired Bonds(s), the Security Deposit shall be forfeited as damages to the Owner by reason of ourfailures.

In the event our Bid is not accepted within the time stated above, the required security deposit shall bereturned to the undersigned, in accordance with the provisions of the Instructions to Bidders; unless amutually satisfactory arrangement is made for its retention and validity for an extended period of time.

CONTRACT TIMEPART 3 -

If the Bid is accepted, we will:

Complete the work in manner consistent to meet the requirements of the schedule.

Contractor has examined the Schedule included in these documents and takes no exception, or recordsthe following exceptions:

___________________________________________________________________________________

CONTRACTOR’S FEES FOR CHANGES IN THE WORKPART 4 -

Lump Sum of Time and Materials Changes: We the undersigned bidder agree that the followingpercentages for overhead and profit shall be added to job costs for the net amount of work added to ordeleted from the contract by written lump sum or time and material change orders recommended by theEngineer and approved by the Owner:



Page 2 of 3

Add to net extra for job costs for additional work performed by:

Our own forces 15%Our subcontractor 5% (including assigned subcontractors)

Note: Insurance, bond, and taxes are considered as job cost items and are included in the percentageslisted above.

ADDENDAPART 5 -

The following Addenda have been received. The modifications to the Bid Documents noted therein havebeen considered and all costs thereto are included in the Bid Sum.

Addendum # Dated

Addendum # Dated

BID FORM SIGNATURE(S)PART 6 -

The Corporate Seal of:

___________________________________________________________________________________(Bidder – please print the full name of your Proprietorship, Partnership, or Corporation)

Was hereunto affixed in the presence of:

__________________________________ ____________________________________(Authorized signing officer) (Title)

(Seal)

If the bid is a joint venture or partnership, add additional forms of execution for each member of the jointventure in the appropriate form or forms as above.




Page 3 of 3

SECTION 000410 – BID BOND

BID BOND INFORMATION1.1

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT WEA.________________________________________________ as Principal, hereinaftercalled the Principal, and _____________________________________________corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Illinois as Surety, are held andfirmly bound unto _________________________________ as Obligee, hereinaftercalled Obligee, in the sum of_________________________________________________________________Dollars ($______________________) for the payment of which sum well and truly to bemade, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors,administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for:B.______________________________________________________________________

NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the PrincipalC.shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, andgive such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents withgood and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for theprompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof; or in the eventof the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if thePrincipal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof betweenthe amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may ingood faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then thisobligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect.

Signed and sealed this ____ day of ____________________________________, 2013.D.

______________________________________________________________________E.(Principal) (Seal)

______________________________________________________________________F.(Witness) (Title)

______________________________________________________________________G.(Surety) (Seal)



BID BONDSection 00410

Page 1 of 1

SECTION 000440 – SUBSTITUTION SHEET

SUBSTITUTION INFORMATION1.1

All bids shall be based upon the provisions of the proposed Contract Documents.A.

Bidders desiring to make substitutions for "proprietary brands" specified shall list suchB.proposed substitutions below, together with the amount to be added or deducted from theamounts of their base bids.

The Owner reserves the right to reject all such substitutions, and such substitutions willC.not be used to determine the low bid.

Complete descriptions and technical data shall accompany all proposed substitutions.D.

Manufacturer's names and material approved by the Architect during the bidding time,E.but not shown in Addenda, must be listed below if said material is to be considered.

PRODUCT SPECIFIED & PROPOSED ADD/DEDUCT AMOUNTF.

________________________________________________________________1.________________________________________________________________2.________________________________________________________________3.________________________________________________________________4.________________________________________________________________5.________________________________________________________________6.________________________________________________________________7.________________________________________________________________8.

Name of Bidder:G.______________________________________________________________________

Date:H.______________________________________________________________________



SUBSTITUTION SHEETSection 00440

Page 1 of 1

SECTION 00485 – CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH ILLINOIS DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE

CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH ILLINOIS DRUG-FREE ACT INFORMATION1.1

_________________________________________________________, Contractor,A.having 25 employees, does hereby certify pursuant to Section 3 of the Illinois Drug-FreeWorkplace Act (III. Rev. Stat. ch. 127 par. 132.313) that it shall provide a drug freeworkplace for all employees engaged in the performance of work under the contract bycomplying with the requirements of the Illinois Drug Free Workplace Act and, furthercertified, that it is not ineligible for award of this contract by reason of debarment for aviolation of the Illinois Drug-Free Workplace Act.

Firm Name:B.______________________________________________________________________

By:C.______________________________________________________________________(Authorized Agent of Contractor)



CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITHILLINOIS DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE

Section 00485Page 1 of 1

SECTION 00487 – CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH ILLINOIS HUMAN RIGHTS ACT

CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH ILLINOIS HUMAN RIGHTS ACT1.1

_________________________________________________________, Contractor,A.does hereby certify pursuant to P.A. 87-1257, the Illinois Human Rights Act, that(he, she,it) has adopted a written sexual harassment policy that includes at a minimum thefollowing information: (i) the illegality of sexual harassment; (ii) the definition of sexualharassment under Illinois law; (iii) a description of sexual harassment, utilizing examples;(iv) an employer's internal complaint process, including penalty; (v) the legal recourse,investigative and complaint process available through the Department of Human RightsCommission; (vi) directions on how to contact the Department and Commission; and (vii)protection against retaliation as provided by Section 6-101 of the Illinois Human RightsAct.

Firm Name:B.______________________________________________________________________

By:C.______________________________________________________________________(Authorized Agent of Contractor)



CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITHILLINOIS HUMAN RIGHTS ACT


SECTION 00488 – CERTIFICATE REGARDING CRIMINAL BACKGROUND INVESTIGATIONS

CERTIFICATE REGARDING CRIMINAL BACKGROUND INVESTIGATIONS1.1

_________________________________________________________, ContractorA.hereby represents, warrants, and certifies that no officer or director thereof has anyknowledge that any employee thereof has been convicted of committing or attempting tocommit "Criminal Code of 1961," 720 ILCS, Sections 5/11-6 (Indecent solicitation of achild), 5111-9 (Public indecency), 5/11-14 (Prostitution), 5/11-15 (Soliciting for aprostitute), 5/11-15.1 (Soliciting for a juvenile prostitute), 5/11-19 (Pimping), 5/11-19.1(Juvenile pimping), 5/11-19.2 (Exploitation of a child), 5/11-20 (Obscenity), 5/11-20.1(Sexual assault), 5/12-14 (Aggravated criminal sexual assault), 5/12-15 (Criminal sexualabuse), and 5/12-16 (Aggravated criminal sexual abuse), and/or those offenses definedin the "Cannabis Control Act," 720 ILCS, 550/1 et. seq. (except the "Illinois ControlledSubstances Act," 720 ILCS 570/100 et. seq. and/or any offense committed or attemptedin any other state or against the laws of the United States, which if committed orattempted in this State, would have been punishable as one or more of the foregoingoffenses. Contractor further agrees that it shall not employ any person who have or mayhave direct, daily contact with students, and for whom a criminal backgroundinvestigation has not been conducted pursuant hereto, and further represents and agreesthat all applicants for any such employment shall furnish with their applications theattached written "Authorization for Criminal Background Information" form authorizing theBoard of Trustees to request a criminal background investigation of said applicantpursuant to Section 5/10-21.9 of the School Code of Illinois and to receive criminalhistory record information pursuant thereto to determine if the applicant has beenconvicted of committing or attempting to commit any of the criminal or drug offensesenumerated above. Contractor further agrees to submit with said authorization paymentfor any costs and expenses associated with the criminal background investigationContractor further represents, warrants, and certifies that no applicant for employmentwith respect to whom the criminal investigation reveals any conviction for committingand/or attempting to commit any of the above enumerated offenses, shall be employedthereby in any position that involves or may involve contact with the students of thecollege. This certification is executed on the date hereinafter indicated by the designatedcontractor by its duly authorized officer.

By: __________________________________________________________________B.

Its: __________________________________________________________________C.

Dated: ________________________________D.



CERTIFICATE REGARDING CRIMINALBACKGROUND INVESTIGATIONS


SECTION 00489 – AUTHORIZATION FOR CRIMINAL BACKGROUND INVESTIGATION

AUTHORIZATION FOR CRIMINAL BACKGROUND INVESTIGATION INFORMATION1.1

The undersigned hereby authorizes the Board of Trustees, Morton College, CookA.County, Illinois to request a criminal background investigation from the Illinois StatePolice, pursuant to Section 5/1--21.9 of the School Code of Illinois, 105 ILCS 5/10-21.9and to receive criminal history record information pursuant thereto.

By:B.______________________________________________________________________(Printed/Typed Name of Applicant Employee)

By:C.______________________________________________________________________(Signature of Applicant or Employee)

Dated: ________________________________D.

NOTE: SIGNATURE NOT REQUIRED FOR SUBMITTAL WITH BID; THIS FORM ISE.REFERRED TO IN DOCUMENT 000488 FOR USE WITH EMPLOYMENTAPPLICATIONS.



AUTHORIZATION FOR CRIMINALBACKGROUND INVESTIGATION


SECTION 000495 – BIDDER ELIGIBILITY CERTIFICATION AND NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT

BIDDER ELIGIBILITY CERTIFICATION AND NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT1.1

Public Act 85-1295 (Illinois Revised Statutes, 1987, ch. 38, art. 33E) requires that allA.contractors bidding for public agencies in the State of Illinois certify that they are notbarred from bidding on public contracts for bid rigging or bid rotation.

The following certification must be signed and submitted with bidder's bid proposal.B.FAILURE TO DO SO WILL RESULT IN DISQUALIFICATION OF THE BIDDER.

(Name of Contractor) _____________________________________________ 1.as part of its bid on Contract for (Name of Project)_______________________________________________________________hereby certifies that said contractor is not barred from bidding on theaforementioned contract as a result of a violation of either Section 33E 3 or 33E-4 of Article 33E of Chapter 38 of the Illinois Revised Statutes.The undersigned further certifies and affirms that this proposal was prepared2.independently for this project and that it contains no fees or amounts other thanfor legitimate execution of this work as specified and that it includes nounderstandings or agreements in restraint of trade.

______________________________________________________________________C.(Firm Name)

______________________________________________________________________D.(Name of Authorized Agent of Contractor)

______________________________________________________________________E.(Signature of Authorized Agent of Contractor)

Subscribe and sworn to before me this _______ day of __________________________F.

______________________________________________________________________G.(Signature of Notary Public)

Notary Seal:H.



BIDDER ELIGIBILITY CERTIFICATION ANDNON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT


SECTION 00820 PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS

REQUIREMENTS1.1

Each Contractor shall comply with requirements of "An Act regulating wages of laborers,A.mechanics and other workmen employed in any public works by the State, County, Cityor by any public body or any political subdivision or by anyone under contract for publicworks".

If, during the course of work under this contract, the Department of Labor revises theB.prevailing rate hourly wages to be paid under this contract for any trade or occupation,Owner, will notify Contractor and each Subcontractor of the changes in the prevailing rateof hourly wages. Contractor shall have the sole responsibility and duty to ensure that therevised prevailing rate of hourly wages is paid by Contractor and all Subcontractors toeach worker to whom a revised rate is applicable. Revisions to the prevailing wage as setforth above shall not result in an increase in the Contract Sum.

ACT AND ORDINANCES1.2

"An Act requiring wages of laborers, mechanics and other workmen employed in anyA.public works by the State, County, City of any public body or any political subdivision orby anyone under contract for public works . . . ", Illinois Revised Statutes, 1981, Chapter48, Sections 39s1 through 39s

A copy of Illinois Department of Labor Prevailing Wages for Cook County1.effective February 1, 2013 is included herein.


PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTSSection 00820

Page 1 of 1

Cook County Prevailing Wage for February 2013(See explanation of column headings at bottom of wages)

Trade Name RG TYP C Base FRMAN M-F>8 OSA OSH H/W Pensn Vac Trng ==================== == === = ====== ====== ===== === === ===== ===== ===== ===== ASBESTOS ABT-GEN ALL 36.200 36.700 1.5 1.5 2.0 12.78 9.020 0.000 0.500 ASBESTOS ABT-MEC BLD 34.160 36.660 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.82 10.66 0.000 0.720 BOILERMAKER BLD 43.450 47.360 2.0 2.0 2.0 6.970 14.66 0.000 0.350 BRICK MASON BLD 40.680 44.750 1.5 1.5 2.0 9.550 12.00 0.000 0.970 CARPENTER ALL 41.520 43.520 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.19 11.75 0.000 0.530 CEMENT MASON ALL 42.350 44.350 2.0 1.5 2.0 11.21 11.40 0.000 0.320 CERAMIC TILE FNSHER BLD 34.440 0.000 2.0 1.5 2.0 9.700 6.930 0.000 0.610 COMM. ELECT. BLD 37.500 40.150 1.5 1.5 2.0 8.420 9.980 1.100 0.700 ELECTRIC PWR EQMT OP ALL 43.350 48.350 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.38 13.50 0.000 0.430 ELECTRIC PWR GRNDMAN ALL 33.810 48.350 1.5 1.5 2.0 8.090 10.53 0.000 0.330 ELECTRIC PWR LINEMAN ALL 43.350 48.350 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.38 13.50 0.000 0.430 ELECTRICIAN ALL 42.000 44.800 1.5 1.5 2.0 12.83 13.07 0.000 0.750 ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR BLD 49.080 55.215 2.0 2.0 2.0 11.88 12.71 3.930 0.600 FENCE ERECTOR ALL 33.740 35.740 1.5 1.5 2.0 12.61 10.18 0.000 0.250 GLAZIER BLD 39.500 41.000 1.5 2.0 2.0 11.99 14.30 0.000 0.840 HT/FROST INSULATOR BLD 45.550 48.050 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.82 11.86 0.000 0.720 IRON WORKER ALL 40.750 42.750 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.20 19.09 0.000 0.350 LABORER ALL 36.200 36.950 1.5 1.5 2.0 12.78 9.020 0.000 0.500 LATHER ALL 41.520 43.520 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.19 11.75 0.000 0.530 MACHINIST BLD 43.550 46.050 1.5 1.5 2.0 6.130 8.950 1.850 0.000 MARBLE FINISHERS ALL 29.700 0.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 9.550 11.75 0.000 0.620 MARBLE MASON BLD 39.880 43.870 1.5 1.5 2.0 9.550 11.75 0.000 0.730 MATERIAL TESTER I ALL 26.200 0.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 12.78 9.020 0.000 0.500 MATERIALS TESTER II ALL 31.200 0.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 12.78 9.020 0.000 0.500 MILLWRIGHT ALL 41.520 43.520 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.19 11.75 0.000 0.530 OPERATING ENGINEER BLD 1 45.100 49.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 15.70 10.55 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER BLD 2 43.800 49.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 15.70 10.55 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER BLD 3 41.250 49.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 15.70 10.55 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER BLD 4 39.500 49.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 15.70 10.55 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER BLD 5 48.850 49.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 15.70 10.55 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER BLD 6 46.100 49.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 15.70 10.55 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER BLD 7 48.100 49.100 2.0 2.0 2.0 15.70 10.55 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER FLT 1 51.300 51.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 11.70 8.050 1.900 1.150 OPERATING ENGINEER FLT 2 49.800 51.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 11.70 8.050 1.900 1.150 OPERATING ENGINEER FLT 3 44.350 51.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 11.70 8.050 1.900 1.150 OPERATING ENGINEER FLT 4 36.850 51.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 11.70 8.050 1.900 1.150 OPERATING ENGINEER HWY 1 43.300 47.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 15.70 10.55 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER HWY 2 42.750 47.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 15.70 10.55 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER HWY 3 40.700 47.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 15.70 10.55 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER HWY 4 39.300 47.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 15.70 10.55 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER HWY 5 38.100 47.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 15.70 10.55 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER HWY 6 46.300 47.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 15.70 10.55 1.900 1.250 OPERATING ENGINEER HWY 7 44.300 47.300 1.5 1.5 2.0 15.70 10.55 1.900 1.250 ORNAMNTL IRON WORKER ALL 40.800 43.300 2.0 2.0 2.0 12.86 15.61 0.000 0.500 PAINTER ALL 40.000 44.750 1.5 1.5 1.5 9.750 11.10 0.000 0.770 PAINTER SIGNS BLD 33.920 38.090 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.600 2.710 0.000 0.000 PILEDRIVER ALL 41.520 43.520 1.5 1.5 2.0 13.19 11.75 0.000 0.530 PIPEFITTER BLD 45.050 48.050 1.5 1.5 2.0 8.460 14.85 0.000 1.780 PLASTERER BLD 40.250 42.670 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.85 10.94 0.000 0.550 PLUMBER BLD 45.000 47.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 12.53 10.06 0.000 0.880 ROOFER BLD 38.350 41.350 1.5 1.5 2.0 8.280 8.770 0.000 0.430 SHEETMETAL WORKER BLD 40.810 44.070 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.13 17.79 0.000 0.630 SIGN HANGER BLD 30.210 30.710 1.5 1.5 2.0 4.850 3.030 0.000 0.000 SPRINKLER FITTER BLD 49.200 51.200 1.5 1.5 2.0 10.25 8.200 0.000 0.450 STEEL ERECTOR ALL 40.750 42.750 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.20 19.09 0.000 0.350

Page 1 of 7Cook County Prevailing Wage for February 2013

2/1/2013http://www.state.il.us/agency/idol/rates/EVENMO/COOK9999.htm

STONE MASON BLD 40.680 44.750 1.5 1.5 2.0 9.550 12.00 0.000 0.970 TERRAZZO FINISHER BLD 35.510 0.000 1.5 1.5 2.0 9.700 9.320 0.000 0.400 TERRAZZO MASON BLD 39.370 42.370 1.5 1.5 2.0 9.700 10.66 0.000 0.550 TILE MASON BLD 41.430 45.430 2.0 1.5 2.0 9.700 8.640 0.000 0.710 TRAFFIC SAFETY WRKR HWY 28.250 29.850 1.5 1.5 2.0 4.896 4.175 0.000 0.000 TRUCK DRIVER E ALL 1 33.850 34.500 1.5 1.5 2.0 8.150 8.500 0.000 0.150 TRUCK DRIVER E ALL 2 34.100 34.500 1.5 1.5 2.0 8.150 8.500 0.000 0.150 TRUCK DRIVER E ALL 3 34.300 34.500 1.5 1.5 2.0 8.150 8.500 0.000 0.150 TRUCK DRIVER E ALL 4 34.500 34.500 1.5 1.5 2.0 8.150 8.500 0.000 0.150 TRUCK DRIVER W ALL 1 32.550 33.100 1.5 1.5 2.0 6.500 4.350 0.000 0.000 TRUCK DRIVER W ALL 2 32.700 33.100 1.5 1.5 2.0 6.500 4.350 0.000 0.000 TRUCK DRIVER W ALL 3 32.900 33.100 1.5 1.5 2.0 6.500 4.350 0.000 0.000 TRUCK DRIVER W ALL 4 33.100 33.100 1.5 1.5 2.0 6.500 4.350 0.000 0.000 TUCKPOINTER BLD 40.950 41.950 1.5 1.5 2.0 8.180 10.82 0.000 0.940

Legend:

ExplanationsCOOK COUNTY

The following list is considered as those days for which holiday ratesof wages for work performed apply: New Years Day, Memorial Day,Fourth of July, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day andVeterans Day in some classifications/counties. Generally, any ofthese holidays which fall on a Sunday is celebrated on the followingMonday. This then makes work performed on that Monday payable at theappropriate overtime rate for holiday pay. Common practice in a givenlocal may alter certain days of celebration. If in doubt, pleasecheck with IDOL.

TRUCK DRIVERS (WEST) - That part of the county West of BarringtonRoad.

EXPLANATION OF CLASSES

ASBESTOS - GENERAL - removal of asbestos material/mold and hazardousmaterials from any place in a building, including mechanical systemswhere those mechanical systems are to be removed. This includes theremoval of asbestos materials/mold and hazardous materials fromductwork or pipes in a building when the building is to be demolishedat the time or at some close future date.ASBESTOS - MECHANICAL - removal of asbestos material from mechanicalsystems, such as pipes, ducts, and boilers, where the mechanicalsystems are to remain.

CERAMIC TILE FINISHER

The grouting, cleaning, and polishing of all classes of tile, whetherfor interior or exterior purposes, all burned, glazed or unglazedproducts; all composition materials, granite tiles, warning detectable

RG (Region)TYP (Trade Type - All,Highway,Building,Floating,Oil & Chip,Rivers)C (Class)Base (Base Wage Rate)FRMAN (Foreman Rate)M-F>8 (OT required for any hour greater than 8 worked each day, Mon through Fri.OSA (Overtime (OT) is required for every hour worked on Saturday)OSH (Overtime is required for every hour worked on Sunday and Holidays)H/W (Health & Welfare Insurance)Pensn (Pension)Vac (Vacation)Trng (Training)



tiles, cement tiles, epoxy composite materials, pavers, glass,mosaics, fiberglass, and all substitute materials, for tile made intile-like units; all mixtures in tile like form of cement, metals, andother materials that are for and intended for use as a finished floorsurface, stair treads, promenade roofs, walks, walls, ceilings,swimming pools, and all other places where tile is to form a finishedinterior or exterior. The mixing of all setting mortars including butnot limited to thin-set mortars, epoxies, wall mud, and any othersand and cement mixtures or adhesives when used in the preparation,installation, repair, or maintenance of tile and/or similar materials.The handling and unloading of all sand, cement, lime, tile,fixtures, equipment, adhesives, or any other materials to be used inthe preparation, installation, repair, or maintenance of tile and/orsimilar materials. Ceramic Tile Finishers shall fill all joints andvoids regardless of method on all tile work, particularly andespecially after installation of said tile work. Application of anyand all protective coverings to all types of tile installationsincluding, but not be limited to, all soap compounds, paper products,tapes, and all polyethylene coverings, plywood, masonite, cardboard,and any new type of products that may be used to protect tileinstallations, Blastrac equipment, and all floor scarifying equipmentused in preparing floors to receive tile. The clean up and removal ofall waste and materials. All demolition of existing tile floors andwalls to be re-tiled.

COMMUNICATIONS ELECTRICIAN

Installation, operation, inspection, maintenance, repair and serviceof radio, television, recording, voice sound vision production andreproduction, telephone and telephone interconnect, facsimile, dataapparatus, coaxial, fibre optic and wireless equipment, appliances andsystems used for the transmission and reception of signals of anynature, business, domestic, commercial, education, entertainment, andresidential purposes, including but not limited to, communication andtelephone, electronic and sound equipment, fibre optic and datacommunication systems, and the performance of any task directlyrelated to such installation or service whether at new or existingsites, such tasks to include the placing of wire and cable andelectrical power conduit or other raceway work within the equipmentroom and pulling wire and/or cable through conduit and theinstallation of any incidental conduit, such that the employeescovered hereby can complete any job in full.

MARBLE FINISHER

Loading and unloading trucks, distribution of all materials (allstone, sand, etc.), stocking of floors with material, performing allrigging for heavy work, the handling of all material that may beneeded for the installation of such materials, building ofscaffolding, polishing if needed, patching, waxing of material ifdamaged, pointing up, caulking, grouting and cleaning of marble,holding water on diamond or Carborundum blade or saw for setterscutting, use of tub saw or any other saw needed for preparation ofmaterial, drilling of holes for wires that anchor material set bysetters, mixing up of molding plaster for installation of material,mixing up thin set for the installation of material, mixing up of sandto cement for the installation of material and such other work as maybe required in helping a Marble Setter in the handling of allmaterial in the erection or installation of interior marble, slate,travertine, art marble, serpentine, alberene stone, blue stone,granite and other stones (meaning as to stone any foreign or domesticmaterials as are specified and used in building interiors and



exteriors and customarily known as stone in the trade), carrara,sanionyx, vitrolite and similar opaque glass and the laying of allmarble tile, terrazzo tile, slate tile and precast tile, steps, riserstreads, base, or any other materials that may be used as substitutesfor any of the aforementioned materials and which are used on interiorand exterior which are installed in a similar manner.

MATERIAL TESTER I: Hand coring and drilling for testing of materials;field inspection of uncured concrete and asphalt.

MATERIAL TESTER II: Field inspection of welds, structural steel,fireproofing, masonry, soil, facade, reinforcing steel, formwork,cured concrete, and concrete and asphalt batch plants; adjustingproportions of bituminous mixtures.

OPERATING ENGINEER - BUILDING

Class 1. Asphalt Plant; Asphalt Spreader; Autograde; Backhoes withCaisson Attachment; Batch Plant; Benoto (requires Two Engineers);Boiler and Throttle Valve; Caisson Rigs; Central Redi-Mix Plant;Combination Back Hoe Front End-loader Machine; Compressor and ThrottleValve; Concrete Breaker (Truck Mounted); Concrete Conveyor; ConcreteConveyor (Truck Mounted); Concrete Paver Over 27E cu. ft; ConcretePaver 27E cu. ft. and Under: Concrete Placer; Concrete Placing Boom;Concrete Pump (Truck Mounted); Concrete Tower; Cranes, All; Cranes,Hammerhead; Cranes, (GCI and similar Type); Creter Crane; Crusher,Stone, etc.; Derricks, All; Derricks, Traveling; Formless Curb andGutter Machine; Grader, Elevating; Grouting Machines; Highlift Shovelsor Front Endloader 2-1/4 yd. and over; Hoists, Elevators, outsidetype rack and pinion and similar machines; Hoists, One, Two and ThreeDrum; Hoists, Two Tugger One Floor; Hydraulic Backhoes; Hydraulic BoomTrucks; Hydro Vac (and similar equipment); Locomotives, All; MotorPatrol; Lubrication Technician; Manipulators; Pile Drivers and SkidRig; Post Hole Digger; Pre-Stress Machine; Pump Cretes Dual Ram; PumpCretes: Squeeze Cretes-Screw Type Pumps; Gypsum Bulker and Pump;Raised and Blind Hole Drill; Roto Mill Grinder; Scoops - TractorDrawn; Slip-Form Paver; Straddle Buggies; Tournapull; Tractor withBoom and Side Boom; Trenching Machines.

Class 2. Boilers; Broom, All Power Propelled; Bulldozers; ConcreteMixer (Two Bag and Over); Conveyor, Portable; Forklift Trucks;Highlift Shovels or Front Endloaders under 2-1/4 yd.; Hoists,Automatic; Hoists, Inside Elevators; Hoists, Sewer Dragging Machine;Hoists, Tugger Single Drum; Rock Drill (Self-Propelled); Rock Drill(Truck Mounted); Rollers, All; Steam Generators; Tractors, All;Tractor Drawn Vibratory Roller; Winch Trucks with "A" Frame.

Class 3. Air Compressor; Combination Small Equipment Operator;Generators; Heaters, Mechanical; Hoists, Inside Elevators; HydraulicPower Units (Pile Driving, Extracting, and Drilling); Pumps, over 3"(1 to 3 not to exceed a total of 300 ft.); Low Boys; Pumps, WellPoints; Welding Machines (2 through 5); Winches, 4 Small ElectricDrill Winches; Bobcats (up to and including ¾ cu yd.) .

Class 4. Bobcats and/or other Skid Steer Loaders (other than bobcatsup to and including ¾ cu yd.); Oilers; and Brick Forklift.

Class 5. Assistant Craft Foreman.

Class 6. Gradall.



Class 7. Mechanics.

OPERATING ENGINEERS - HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION

Class 1. Asphalt Plant; Asphalt Heater and Planer Combination; AsphaltHeater Scarfire; Asphalt Spreader; Autograder/GOMACO or other similartype machines: ABG Paver; Backhoes with Caisson Attachment; BallastRegulator; Belt Loader; Caisson Rigs; Car Dumper; Central Redi-MixPlant; Combination Backhoe Front Endloader Machine, (1 cu. yd. BackhoeBucket or over or with attachments); Concrete Breaker (TruckMounted); Concrete Conveyor; Concrete Paver over 27E cu. ft.; ConcretePlacer; Concrete Tube Float; Cranes, all attachments; Cranes, TowerCranes of all types: Creter Crane: Crusher, Stone, etc.; Derricks,All; Derrick Boats; Derricks, Traveling; Dowell Machine with AirCompressor; Dredges; Formless Curb and Gutter Machine; Grader,Elevating; Grader, Motor Grader, Motor Patrol, Auto Patrol, FormGrader, Pull Grader, Subgrader; Guard Rail Post Driver Truck Mounted;Hoists, One, Two and Three Drum; Hydraulic Backhoes; Backhoes withshear attachments; Lubrication Technician; Manipulators; MuckingMachine; Pile Drivers and Skid Rig; Pre-Stress Machine; Pump CretesDual Ram; Rock Drill - Crawler or Skid Rig; Rock Drill - TruckMounted; Rock/Track Tamper; Roto Mill Grinder; Slip-Form Paver; SoilTest Drill Rig (Truck Mounted); Straddle Buggies; HydraulicTelescoping Form (Tunnel); Tractor Drawn Belt Loader (with attachedpusher - two engineers); Tractor with Boom; Tractaire withAttachments; Trenching Machine; Truck Mounted Concrete Pump with Boom;Raised or Blind Hole Drills (Tunnel Shaft); Underground Boring and/orMining Machines 5 ft. in diameter and over tunnel, etc; UndergroundBoring and/or Mining Machines under 5 ft. in diameter; WheelExcavator; Widener (APSCO).

Class 2. Batch Plant; Bituminous Mixer; Boiler and Throttle Valve;Bulldozers; Car Loader Trailing Conveyors; Combination Backhoe FrontEndloader Machine (Less than 1 cu. yd. Backhoe Bucket or over or withattachments); Compressor and Throttle Valve; Compressor, CommonReceiver (3); Concrete Breaker or Hydro Hammer; Concrete GrindingMachine; Concrete Mixer or Paver 7S Series to and including 27 cu.ft.; Concrete Spreader; Concrete Curing Machine, Burlap Machine,Belting Machine and Sealing Machine; Concrete Wheel Saw; Conveyor MuckCars (Haglund or Similar Type); Drills, All; Finishing Machine -Concrete; Highlift Shovels or Front Endloader; Hoist - Sewer DraggingMachine; Hydraulic Boom Trucks (All Attachments); Hydro-Blaster; AllLocomotives, Dinky; Off-Road Hauling Units (including articulating)/2ton capacity or more; Non Self-Loading Ejection Dump; Pump Cretes:Squeeze Cretes - Screw Type Pumps, Gypsum Bulker and Pump; Roller,Asphalt; Rotary Snow Plows; Rototiller, Seaman, etc., self-propelled;Scoops - Tractor Drawn; Self-Propelled Compactor; Spreader - Chip -Stone, etc.; Scraper; Scraper - Prime Mover in Tandem (Regardless ofSize): Tank Car Heater; Tractors, Push, Pulling Sheeps Foot, Disc,Compactor, etc.; Tug Boats.

Class 3. Boilers; Brooms, All Power Propelled; Cement Supply Tender;Compressor, Common Receiver (2); Concrete Mixer (Two Bag and Over);Conveyor, Portable; Farm-Type Tractors Used for Mowing, Seeding, etc.;Fireman on Boilers; Forklift Trucks; Grouting Machine; Hoists,Automatic; Hoists, All Elevators; Hoists, Tugger Single Drum; JeepDiggers; Low Boys; Pipe Jacking Machines; Post-Hole Digger; Power Saw,Concrete Power Driven; Pug Mills; Rollers, other than Asphalt; Seedand Straw Blower; Steam Generators; Stump Machine; Winch Trucks with"A" Frame; Work Boats; Tamper-Form-Motor Driven.



Class 4. Air Compressor; Combination - Small Equipment Operator;Directional Boring Machine; Generators; Heaters, Mechanical; HydraulicPower Unit (Pile Driving, Extracting, or Drilling); Hydro- Blaster;Light Plants, All (1 through 5); Pumps, over 3" (1 to 3 not to exceeda total of 300 ft.); Pumps, Well Points; Tractaire; Welding Machines(2 through 5); Winches, 4 Small Electric Drill Winches.

Class 5. Bobcats (all); Brick Forklifts; Oilers.

Class 6. Field Mechanics and Field Welders

Class 7. Gradall and machines of like nature.

OPERATING ENGINEER - FLOATING

Class 1. Craft Foreman; Diver/Wet Tender; and Engineer (hydraulicdredge).

Class 2. Crane/Backhoe Operator; 70 Ton or over Tug Operator;Mechanic/Welder; Assistant Engineer (Hydraulic Dredge); Leverman(Hydraulic Dredge); Diver Tender; Friction and Lattice Boom Cranes.

Class 3. Deck Equipment Operator, Machineryman; Maintenance of Crane(over 50 ton capacity); Tug/Launch Operator; Loader/Dozer and likeequipment on Barge; and Deck Machinery, etc.

Class 4. Deck Equipment Operator, Machineryman/Fireman (4 EquipmentUnits or More); Off Road Trucks (2 ton capacity or more); Deck Hand,Tug Engineer, Crane Maintenance 50 Ton Capacity and Under or BackhoeWeighing 115,000 pounds or less; and Assistant Tug Operator.

TERRAZZO FINISHER

The handling of sand, cement, marble chips, and all other materialsthat may be used by the Mosaic Terrazzo Mechanic, and the mixing,grinding, grouting, cleaning and sealing of all Marble, Mosaic, andTerrazzo work, floors, base, stairs, and wainscoting by hand ormachine, and in addition, assisting and aiding Marble, Masonic, andTerrazzo Mechanics.

TRAFFIC SAFETY

Work associated with barricades, horses and drums used to reduce laneusage on highway work, the installation and removal of temporary lanemarkings, and the installation and removal of temporary road signs.

TRUCK DRIVER - BUILDING, HEAVY AND HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION - EAST & WEST

Class 1. Two or three Axle Trucks. A-frame Truck when used fortransportation purposes; Air Compressors and Welding Machines,including those pulled by cars, pick-up trucks and tractors;Ambulances; Batch Gate Lockers; Batch Hopperman; Car and TruckWashers; Carry-alls; Fork Lifts and Hoisters; Helpers; MechanicsHelpers and Greasers; Oil Distributors 2-man operation; PavementBreakers; Pole Trailer, up to 40 feet; Power Mower Tractors;Self-propelled Chip Spreader; Skipman; Slurry Trucks, 2-man operation;Slurry Truck Conveyor Operation, 2 or 3 man; Teamsters; UnskilledDumpman; and Truck Drivers hauling warning lights, barricades, andportable toilets on the job site.

Class 2. Four axle trucks; Dump Crets and Adgetors under 7 yards;Dumpsters, Track Trucks, Euclids, Hug Bottom Dump Turnapulls or



Turnatrailers when pulling other than self-loading equipment orsimilar equipment under 16 cubic yards; Mixer Trucks under 7 yards;Ready-mix Plant Hopper Operator, and Winch Trucks, 2 Axles.

Class 3. Five axle trucks; Dump Crets and Adgetors 7 yards and over;Dumpsters, Track Trucks, Euclids, Hug Bottom Dump Turnatrailers orturnapulls when pulling other than self-loading equipment or similarequipment over 16 cubic yards; Explosives and/or Fission MaterialTrucks; Mixer Trucks 7 yards or over; Mobile Cranes while in transit;Oil Distributors, 1-man operation; Pole Trailer, over 40 feet; Poleand Expandable Trailers hauling material over 50 feet long; Slurrytrucks, 1-man operation; Winch trucks, 3 axles or more;Mechanic--Truck Welder and Truck Painter.

Class 4. Six axle trucks; Dual-purpose vehicles, such as mountedcrane trucks with hoist and accessories; Foreman; Master Mechanic;Self-loading equipment like P.B. and trucks with scoops on the front.

Other Classifications of Work:

For definitions of classifications not otherwise set out, theDepartment generally has on file such definitions which areavailable. If a task to be performed is not subject to one of theclassifications of pay set out, the Department will upon beingcontacted state which neighboring county has such a classification andprovide such rate, such rate being deemed to exist by reference inthis document. If no neighboring county rate applies to the task,the Department shall undertake a special determination, such specialdetermination being then deemed to have existed under thisdetermination. If a project requires these, or any classification notlisted, please contact IDOL at 217-782-1710 for wage rates orclarifications.

LANDSCAPING

Landscaping work falls under the existing classifications for laborer,operating engineer and truck driver. The work performed bylandscape plantsman and landscape laborer is covered by the existingclassification of laborer. The work performed by landscape operators(regardless of equipment used or its size) is covered by theclassifications of operating engineer. The work performed bylandscape truck drivers (regardless of size of truck driven) iscovered by the classifications of truck driver.



SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY

GENERALPART 1 -

RELATED DOCUMENTS1.1

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryA.Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY1.1

This Section includes the following:B.

Work covered by the Contract Documents.1.Type of the Contract.2.Duties of the Contractor.3.Use of Premises.4.Owner's occupancy requirements.5.Work restrictions.6.

WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS1.2

Project Identification: Interior Renovations at Morton College.A.

Project Location: Morton College, 3801 South Central Avenue, Cicero IL 60804.1.

Owner: Morton College.B.

Owner's Representative: John Potempa, Director of Facilities.1.

Architect: Demonica Kemper ArchitectsC.

Architect’s Representative: Dominick Demonica, AIA, LEED AP1.

The Work consists of the following:D.

Interior Renovations of a Computer Lab and PTA workroom. Scope includes1.demolition of floor and ceiling finishes, partitions, doors, and related MEP work.Proposed work involves new partitions, doors, hardware, floor and ceilingfinishes, one manually operated folding partition, and related MEP work.

TYPE OF CONTRACT1.3

Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.A.

InsuranceB.

Designated Purchaser.1.


SUMMARYSection 01100

Page 1 of 4

Owner shall purchase and maintain Builder's Risk Insurance ina.accordance with the General Conditions.The Builder’s Risk Insurance will be subject to a deductible of $5,000.00b.per occurrence.

DUTIES OF CONTRACTOR1.4

Except as specifically noted, provide and pay for:A.

Labor, materials, and equipment.1.Tools, construction equipment, and machinery.2.Temporary utilities required for construction.3.Other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion4.of work.

Secure and pay for as necessary for proper execution of work, and as applicable at timeB.of receipt of bids:

Permits1.Government Fees2.Licenses3.

Comply with codes, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders, and other legal requirementsC.of public authorities that bear on performance of work.

Promptly submit written notice to Architect of known or observed variances of ContractD.Documents from legal requirements.

Assume responsibility for Work known to be contrary to such requirements.1.

Enforce strict discipline and good order among employees. Do not employ on project:E.

Unfit persons.1.Persons not skilled in assigned task.2.

This project is exempt from all State and Local taxes.F.

Obtain sales tax exemption number from Owner.1.Place exemption certificate number on invoices for materials incorporated into2.work.Upon Owner's request, furnish copies of invoices to Owner.3.Upon completion of work, file with Owner notarized statement that all purchases4.made under exemption certificate were entitled to be exempt.Pay legally assessed penalties for improper use of exemption certificate number.5.

Purchase and maintain insurance in accordance with the General Conditions.G.

Provide required bonds for all portions of the work in accordance with the GeneralH.Conditions.



Page 2 of 4

USE OF PREMISES1.5

General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations asA.indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits.

Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions ofB.Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of areas surrounding project1.site.Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances2.serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, andemergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storageof materials.

Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.a.Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storageb.of materials and equipment on-site.

Employees on Site: The Owner may examine Contractor's list of employees,3.including those of his subcontractors and their agents for all employees workingon site.Vehicle Use: Rigidly enforce the following:4.

Keep all vehicles, mechanized or motorized equipment locked anda.secured at all times when parked and unattended on Owner's premises.Do not, under any circumstance, leave any vehicle unattended withb.motor or engine running, or with ignition key in place.

Do not unreasonably encumber site with materials or equipment.5.Contractor shall assume full responsibility for protection, safety, and safekeeping6.of all products stored on premises.Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work area needed for operations.7.State of Illinois prohibits the use of smoking materials within existing school8.facilities.

OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS1.6

Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy existing campus during entire constructionA.period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts andfacilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-dayoperations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated.

Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect1.Owner's operations.

The date of substantial completion for all work shall be on or before August 9, 2013.B.

WORK RESTRICTIONS1.7

On-Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed during the working hours ofA.



Page 3 of 4

7:00 a.m. to 10:00 p.m., Monday through Saturday, except otherwise indicated.

The date of commencement for all work associated with the Computer Lab shall be on orB.after May 20, 2013. The date of commencement for all work associated with the PTAwork room shall be on or after May 27, 2013.

Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by OwnerC.or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging toprovide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.1.

PRODUCTS (Not Used)PART 2 -

EXECUTION (Not Used)PART 3 -




Page 4 of 4

SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES

GENERALPART 1 -



PROCEDURES1.2

Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completelyA.integrate work of the alternate into Project.

Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and1.similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or notindicated as part of alternate.

Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.B.

Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. SpecificationC.Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achievethe work described under each alternate.


EXECUTIONPART 3 -

SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES3.1

Alternate No. 1: State the amount to be added to the Lump Sum Base Bid for providingA.new plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets and countertop at Room 355C.

Alternate No. 2: State the amount to be deducted from the Lump Sum Base Bid forB.eliminating all work associated with the Computer Labs at Building B.

Alternate No. 3: State the amount to be deducted from the Lump Sum Base Bid forC.eliminating all work associated with the PTA Classroom at Building C.

Alternate No. 4: State the amount to be deducted from the Lump Sum Base Bid forD.eliminating the liquidated damages clause.



ALTERNATESSection 01230

Page 1 of 1

SECTION 01260 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling andA.processing Contract modifications.

Related Sections include the following:B.

Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for1.handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award.

MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK1.3

Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, notA.involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710,"Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

PROPOSAL REQUESTS1.4

Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description ofA.proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or theContract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revisedDrawings and Specifications.

Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider1.them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposedchange.Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request,2.submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and theContract Time necessary to execute the change.

Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unita.costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. Ifrequested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, andb.amounts of trade discounts.Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.c.Change order adjustments to the contract developed above shall included.amounts for overhead and profit which do not exceed average amountsindicated in the Schedule of Values, or a total amount of 15%, whicheveris less, and that no overhead and profit shall be deducted from the total


CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURESSection 01260

Page 1 of 3

price for changes reducing the cost of the contract. If the changed workis performed by a subcontractor, no more than 10% may be added to thesubcontractor's costs for overhead and profit. An additional not toexceed 5% may be included for the Contractor's overhead and profit onall work provided directly by a subcontractor employed on the project.Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates thee.effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activityduration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use availabletotal float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications toB.the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change toArchitect.

Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change1.on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicatethe effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with2.total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish surveydata to substantiate quantities.Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of3.trade discounts.Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.4.Change order adjustments to the contract developed above shall include5.amounts for overhead and profit which do not exceed average amounts indicatedin the Schedule of Values, or a total amount of 15%, whichever is less, and thatno overhead and profit shall be deducted from the total price for changesreducing the cost of the contract. If the changed work is performed by asubcontractor, no more than 10% may be added to the subcontractor's costs foroverhead and profit. An additional not to exceed 5% may be included for theContractor's overhead and profit on all work provided directly by a subcontractoremployed on the project.Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect6.of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start andfinish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requestingan extension of the Contract Time.Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" if the7.proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product orsystem specified.

Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests.C.

ALLOWANCES1.5

Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change OrderA.proposal on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied byfinal measurement of work-in-place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances forcutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similarmargins.

Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the1.allowance.If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution2.of overhead costs and other margins claimed.



Page 2 of 3

Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change3.Orders related to unit-cost allowances.Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by4.independent quantity survey, measure, or count.

Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of theB.allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amountor Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 7days of receipt of the Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing workto proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than 7 days after such authorization.

Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change1.Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work haschanged from what could have been foreseen from information in the ContractDocuments.No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher-2.or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originallyindicated.

CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES1.6

On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order forA.signatures of Owner and Contractor .

CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE1.7

Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive onA.AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceedwith a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also1.designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum orthe Contract Time.

Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work requiredB.by the Construction Change Directive.

After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data1.necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.






Page 3 of 3

SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepareA.and process Applications for Payment.


Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative1.procedures for handling changes to the Contract.Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative2.requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's ConstructionSchedule and Submittals Schedule.

DEFINITIONS1.3

Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of theA.Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewingContractor's Applications for Payment.

SCHEDULE OF VALUES1.4

Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation ofA.Contractor's Construction Schedule.

Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative1.forms and schedules, including the following:

Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.a.Submittals Schedule.b.Contractor's Construction Schedule.c.

Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect/Engineer at earliest possible date but2.no later than seven7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of initialApplication for Payment.

Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establishB.line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for eachSpecification Section.

Identification: Include the following Project Identification on the Schedule of1.


PAYMENT PROCEDURESSection 01290

Page 1 of 5

Values:

Project name and location.a.Name of Architect.b.Architect/Engineer’s project number.c.Contractor's name and address.d.Date of submittal.e.

Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets.2.Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate3.the following for each item listed:

Related Specification Section or Division.a.Description of the Work.b.Name of subcontractor.c.Name of manufacturer or fabricator.d.Name of supplier.e.Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.f.Dollar value.g.

Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth1)percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued4.evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate withthe Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principalsubcontract amounts, where appropriate.Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.5.Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work6.where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchasedor fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Ifa.specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing.

Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials,7.for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that partof the Work.

Provide a separate line item for each item with a value of more thana.$5,000.00.

Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each8.allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unitcost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the ContractDocuments to determine quantities.Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be9.complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead andprofit for each item.

Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost ofa.actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in theSchedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, atContractor's option.



Page 2 of 5

Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the10.next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction ChangeDirectives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT1.5

Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications andA.payments as certified by Architect/Engineer and paid for by Owner.

Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial1.Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703B.Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.

Preliminary Application:C.

Submit three pencil copies of each Application for Payment for review and1.approval by Architect/Engineer and Owner.Revise Application for Payment as directed by Architect/Engineer.2.Once pencil copy has been approved by Architect/Engineer, send Final3.Applications for Payment along with supporting documentation toArchitect/Engineer.

Final Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by aD.person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. will returnincomplete applications without action.

Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's1.Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued2.before last day of construction period covered by application.

Payroll Certification: Submit Payroll Certification in accordance with the Prevailing WageE.Act as ammended in Public Act 094-0515, including, but not limited to, the following:

Certified payroll for all laborers, mechanics, and other workers employed on the1.project, including each worker's name, address, telephone number whenavailable, social security number, classification, the hourly wages paid in eachpay period, the number of hours worked each day, and the starting and endingtimes of work each day.Statement signed by the contractor or subcontractor which states that:2.

Such records are true and accurate.a.The hourly rate paid to each worker is not less than the generalb.prevailing rate of hourly wages required by the Prevailing Wage Act.The contractor or subcontractor is aware that filing a certified payroll thatc.he or she knows to be false is a Class B misdemeanor. A generalcontractor is not prohibited from relying on the certification of a lower tiersubcontractor, provided the general contractor does not knowingly relyon a subcontractor's false certification. Any contractor or subcontractorsubject to the Prevailing Wage Act who fails to submit a certified payrollor knowingly files a false certified payroll is in violation of The Prevailing



Page 3 of 5

Wage Act and guilty of a Class B misdemeanor.

Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application forF.Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shallinclude waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers ofG.mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arisingout of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.

Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous1.application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.2.Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must3.submit waivers.

Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers ofH.mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for constructionperiod covered by the previous application.

Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous1.application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.2.Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must3.submit waivers.Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every4.entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who islawfully entitled to a lien.

Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precedeI.or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

List of subcontractors.1.Schedule of Values.2.Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).3.Products list.4.Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).5.List of Contractor's staff assignments.6.List of Contractor's principal consultants.7.Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for8.performance of the Work.Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.9.Performance and payment bonds.10.

Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate ofJ.Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percentcompletion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete1.and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued2.previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases andK.supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not



Page 4 of 5

limited, to the following:

Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.1.Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and2.proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.3.AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."4.AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."5.






Page 5 of 5

SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operationsA.on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

Coordination Drawings.1.Administrative and supervisory personnel.2.Project meetings.3.Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).4.

Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas ofB.responsibility will be assigned to a specific contractor.

Related Sections include the following:C.

Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and1.submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule.Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the2.Contract.

DEFINITIONS1.3

RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the ContractA.Documents.

COORDINATION1.4

Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of theA.Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on eachother for proper installation, connection, and operation.

Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those ofB.other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part ofthe Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included indifferent Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, andoperation.

Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results1.where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other


PROJECT MANAGEMENT ANDCOORDINATION


components, before or after its own installation.Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure2.maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.3.Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different4.components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for requiredmaintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical andelectrical.

Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special proceduresC.required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list ofattendees at meetings.

Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination1.of their Work is required.

Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrativeD.procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoidconflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activitiesinclude, but are not limited to, the following:

Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.1.Preparation of the Schedule of Values.2.Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.3.Delivery and processing of submittals.4.Progress meetings.5.Preinstallation conferences.6.Project closeout activities.7.Startup and adjustment of systems.8.Project closeout activities.9.

Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried outE.with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.

Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually1.incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvagedmaterials that are designated as Owner's property.

SUBMITTALS1.5

Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availabilityA.necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of differentcomponents or if coordination is required for installation of products and materialsfabricated by separate entities.

Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base1.Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standardprinted data. Include the following information, as applicable:

Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components ofa.architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.Indicate required installation sequences.b.Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specificc.note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment




and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches toArchitect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes anddifficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches.2.Number of Copies: Submit 5 opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will3.return <3> copies.

Key Personnel Names: Within 7 days of starting construction operations, submit a list ofB.key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendanceat Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addressesand telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names,addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absenceof individuals assigned to Project.

ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL1.6

General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative andA.supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.

Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other1.contractors.

PROJECT MEETINGS1.7

General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unlessA.otherwise indicated.

Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose1.presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner andArchitect of scheduled meeting dates and times.Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited2.attendees.Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute3.the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect,within 7 days of the meeting.

Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before startingB.construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 7 days afterexecution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenientlocation. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their1.consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers;and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at theconference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude mattersrelating to the Work.Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the2.following:

Tentative construction schedule.a.Phasing.b.Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.c.




Designation of key personnel and their duties.d.Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.e.Procedures for RFIs.f.Procedures for testing and inspecting.g.Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.h.Distribution of the Contract Documents.i.Submittal procedures.j.Preparation of Record Documents.k.Use of the premises.l.Work restrictions.m.Owner's occupancy requirements.n.Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.o.Construction waste management and recycling.p.Parking availability.q.Office, work, and storage areas.r.Equipment deliveries and priorities.s.First aid.t.Security.u.Progress cleaning.v.Working hours.w.

Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.3.

Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates ofC.meetings with preparation of payment requests.

Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each1.contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with currentprogress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activitiesshall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shallbe familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting.2.Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics fordiscussion as appropriate to status of Project.

Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the lasta.meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule,or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule.Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; securecommitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedulerevisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activitieswill be completed within the Contract Time.

Review schedule for next period.1)

Review present and future needs of each entity present, including theb.following:

Interface requirements.1)Sequence of operations.2)Status of submittals.3)Deliveries.4)Off-site fabrication.5)Access.6)Site utilization.7)




Temporary facilities and controls.8)Work hours.9)Hazards and risks.10)Progress cleaning.11)Quality and work standards.12)Status of correction of deficient items.13)Field observations.14)RFIs.15)Status of proposal requests.16)Pending changes.17)Status of Change Orders.18)Pending claims and disputes.19)Documentation of information for payment requests.20)

Minutes: Record the meeting minutes.3.Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties4.who should have been present.

Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule aftera.each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been madeor recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report ofeach meeting.

REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)1.8

Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the ContractA.Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare andsubmit an RFI in the form specified.

RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than1.Contractor will be returned with no response.Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in2.Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretationB.and the following:

Project name.1.Date.2.Name of Contractor.3.Name of Architect.4.RFI number, numbered sequentially.5.Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.6.Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.7.Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.8.Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the9.Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.Contractor's signature.10.Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product11.Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe itemsneeding interpretation.

Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall includea.dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of




affected materials, assemblies, and attachments.

Hard-Copy RFIs: CSI Form 13.2A.C.

Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page1.number.

Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same contentD.as indicated above.

Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.1.

Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and returnE.it. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

The following RFIs will be returned without action:1.

Requests for approval of submittals.a.Requests for approval of substitutions.b.Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contractc.Documents.Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.d.Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.e.Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.f.

Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case2.Architect's time for response will start again.Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the3.Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposalaccording to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."

If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contracta.Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days ofreceipt of the RFI response.

On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFIF.response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days ifContractor disagrees with response.

RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFIG.number. Submit log weekly. Software log with not less than the following:

Project name.1.Name and address of Contractor.2.Name and address of Architect.3.RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.4.RFI description.5.Date the RFI was submitted.6.Date Architect's response was received.7.Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change8.Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal9.Request, as appropriate.










SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting theA.progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

Preliminary Construction Schedule.1.Contractor's Construction Schedule.2.Submittals Schedule.3.


Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of1.Values.Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and2.distributing meeting and conference minutes.Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.3.Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests4.and inspections.

DEFINITIONS1.3

Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling,A.monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a constructionschedule consume time and resources.

Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on1.the planned early start and finish times.Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.2.Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.3.

Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Values for the completion of an activityB.as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum,unless otherwise approved by Architect.

CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a constructionC.project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Networkcalculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through theD.network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains nofloat.


CONSTRUCTION PROGRESSDOCUMENTATION


Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.E.

Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.F.

Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor,1.but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties asneeded to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely2.affecting the early start of the successor activity.Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without3.adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smallerG.activities for greater detail.

Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significantH.construction element.

Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.I.

Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities andJ.activity relationships.

Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for theK.completion of an activity as scheduled.

SUBMITTALS1.4

Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.A.

Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the followingB.information in a tabular format:

Scheduled date for first submittal.1.Specification Section number and title.2.Submittal category (action or informational).3.Name of subcontractor.4.Description of the Work covered.5.Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.6.

Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit three opaque copies.C.

Approval of cost-loaded preliminary construction schedule will not constitute1.approval of Schedule of Values for cost-loaded activities.

COORDINATION1.5

Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance ofA.construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.

Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list ofB.subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other




required schedules and reports.

Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from1.parties involved.Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and2.schedule them in proper sequence.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE2.1

Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by datesA.required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal,ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.

Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of1.Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule.Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary network diagram. Include2.submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required tomaintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of longlead time for manufacture or fabrication.Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of3.Contractor's Construction Schedule.

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL2.2

Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning &A.Scheduling."

Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work toB.date of Final Completion.

Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that1.shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for eachC.principal element of the Work. Comply with the following:

Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless1.specifically allowed by Architect.Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in2.Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittalreview times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 5 days for startup and testing.3.Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for4.Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative proceduresnecessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the ContractD.Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work isaffected.




Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:1.

Coordination with existing construction.a.Limitations of continued occupancies.b.Uninterruptible services.c.Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.d.Use of premises restrictions.e.Provisions for future construction.f.Seasonal variations.g.Environmental control.h.

Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of2.the Work, including, but not limited to, the following:

Subcontract awards.a.Submittals.b.Purchases.c.Fabrication.d.Deliveries.e.Installation.f.Tests and inspections.g.Adjusting.h.Startup and placement into final use and operation.i.

Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule,E.including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and FinalCompletion

Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with itsF.submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect ofthe proposed change on the overall project schedule.

PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE2.3

Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction scheduleA.within seven days of date established for the Notice of Award.

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)2.4

Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-A.type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 10 days of date established forcommencement of the Work. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Scheduleand whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project.

Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify firstB.workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.

For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate1.an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.




EXECUTIONPART 3 -

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE3.1

Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule toA.reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before eachregularly scheduled progress meeting.

Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions1.have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with thereport of each such meeting.Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including,2.but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, andactivity durations.As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.3.

Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separateB.contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractorwith a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.1.When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and2.post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they havecompleted their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved inperformance of construction activities.





SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting ShopA.Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.


Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for1.Payment and the Schedule of Values.Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and2.distributing meeting and conference minutes and for submitting CoordinationDrawings.Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting3.schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and theSubmittals Schedule.Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties.4.Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record5.Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.

DEFINITIONS1.3

Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsiveA.action.

Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect'sB.responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES1.4

General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings may be providedA.by Architect/Engineer for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

Contractors and Subcontractors may purchase may purchase electronic media1.files of the Contract Documents. Selected sheets will be made available at acost of $300.00 for all sheets within a single discipline.Upon request to purchase electronic media or files, the Contractor shall complete2.a "Request for Electronic Drawing Files" issued by the Architect/Engineer andissue the appropriate credit to the Owner by change order.Sheets shall be formatted to provide background information only.3.The Contractor may utilize these CAD Drawings in the preparation of their Shop4.


SUBMITTAL PROCEDURESSection 01330

Page 1 of 8

Drawings and As-Built Drawings only.The information issued is provided in a good faith effort to expedite the Project5.and to simplify the efforts of the Contractor with no guarantee by the issuer as tothe accuracy or correctness of the information provided. The Architect/Engineeraccepts no liability for the Contractor's or Subcontractors use of these CADDocuments.The use of these CAD Documents does not relieve the Contractor or6.Subcontractor from their responsibility to field measure existing conditions andproperly fit the work to the Project.These documents will be provided when purchased for the convenience of the7.Contractor and this Project. Ownership and use of the issued documents aregoverned by the General Conditions.

Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance ofB.construction activities.

Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other1.submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the2.Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittalsconcurrently for coordination.

ArchitectEngineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittala.requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals arereceived.

Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "ConstructionC.Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduledperformance of related construction activities.

Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals,D.as follows. Time for review shall commence on receipt of submittal. No extension of theContract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough inadvance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

Initial Review: Allow 10 business days for initial review of each submittal. Allow1.additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required.Architect/Engineer will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed mustbe delayed for coordination.Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same2.manner as initial submittal.Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 business days for review of each resubmittal.3.Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that4.submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect/Engineer and hisconsultants, allow 10 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will bereturned to Architect/Engineer before being returned to Contractor.

Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.E.

Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.1.Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to2.record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken byArchitect/Engineer.Include the following information on label for processing and recording action3.taken:



Page 2 of 8

Project name.a.Date.b.Name and address of Architect.c.Name and address of Contractor.d.Name and address of subcontractor.e.Name and address of supplier.f.Name of manufacturer.g.Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.h.

Submittal number shall use Specification Section number1)followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g.,06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix afteranother decimal point (e.g., 06100.01.A).

Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.i.Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.j.Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.k.Other necessary identification.l.

Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from theF.Contract Documents on submittals.

Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unlessG.Architect /Engineer observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents,initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified1.number of copies to Architect/Engineer.Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with2.action taken and will be returned.

Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal andH.handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect/Engineer willreturn submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor.

Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:1.

Project name.a.Date.b.Destination (To:).c.Source (From:).d.Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.e.Category and type of submittal.f.Submittal purpose and description.g.Specification Section number and title.h.Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.i.Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.j.Submittal and transmittal distribution record.k.Remarks.l.Signature of transmitter.m.

On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record2.relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested byArchitect/Engineer on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in



Page 3 of 8

the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Includesame label information as related submittal.

Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.I.

Note date and content of previous submittal.1.Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent2.of revision.

Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors,J.suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessaryfor performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

ACTION SUBMITTALS2.1

General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual SpecificationA.Sections.

Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of constructionB.and type of product or equipment.

If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed1.data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are2.applicable.Include the following information, as applicable:3.

Manufacturer's written recommendations.a.Manufacturer's product specifications.b.Manufacturer's installation instructions.c.Standard color charts.d.Manufacturer's catalog cuts.e.Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.f.Printed performance curves.g.Operational range diagrams.h.Mill reports.i.Standard product operation and maintenance manuals.j.Compliance with specified referenced standards.k.Testing by recognized testing agency.l.Application of testing agency labels and seals.m.Notation of coordination requirements.n.

Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.4.Number of Copies: Submit Five copies of Product Data, unless otherwise5.indicated. Architect/Engineer will return three copies. Mark up and retain onereturned copy as a Project Record Document.

Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do notC.base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printeddata, unless submittal of Architect/Engineer’s CAD Drawings are otherwise permitted.



Page 4 of 8

Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include1.the following information, as applicable:

Dimensions.a.Identification of products.b.Fabrication and installation drawings.c.Roughing-in and setting diagrams.d.Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal,e.and control wiring.Shopwork manufacturing instructions.f.Templates and patterns.g.Schedules.h.Design calculations.i.Compliance with specified standards.j.Notation of coordination requirements.k.Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.l.Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated.m.Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.n.Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-o.installed wiring.

Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit2.Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40inches.Number of Copies: Submit two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal.3.Architect will return one copy.Number of Copies: Submit three opaque copies of each submittal, unless copies4.are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five copies wherecopies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect/Engineerwill retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain onereturned copy as a Project Record Drawing.

Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check ofD.these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristicsbetween submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories1.together in one submittal package.Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the2.following:

Generic description of Sample.a.Product name and name of manufacturer.b.Sample source.c.Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.d.

Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for3.quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity.Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of constructionassociated with each set.

Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated ina.individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in anundamaged condition at time of use.



Page 5 of 8

Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated asb.Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect/Engineerc.will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up andretain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample.

Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship,1)fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similarcharacteristics are to be demonstrated.If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is2)inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submitat least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits ofvariations.

Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare aE.written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intendedlocation. Include the following information in tabular form:

Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product.1.Number and name of room or space.2.Location within room or space.3.Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless4.otherwise indicated. Architect/Engineer will return two copies.

Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.a.

Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01F.Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for Construction Manager's action.

Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 SectionG."Construction Progress Documentation."

Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 SectionH."Payment Procedures."

Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 SectionI."Payment Procedures."

Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed forJ.each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipmentfabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or1.supplying products.Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.2.Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.3.Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise4.indicated. Architect/Engineer will return two copies.

Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.a.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS2.2

General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other SpecificationA.



Page 6 of 8

Sections.

Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise1.indicated. Architect will not return copies.Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes2.signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates andcertifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to signdocuments on behalf of that entity.Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 013.Section "Quality Requirements."

Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 SectionB."Project Management and Coordination."

Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01C.Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifyingD.that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required,is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterheadE.certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifyingF.that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifyingG.that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testingH.agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliancewith requirements in the Contract Documents.

Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced byI.manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports onevaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testingagency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,J.performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, andcalculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and asummary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version ofsoftware, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documentsK.manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating aproduct or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephonenumber of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:

Preparation of substrates.1.Required substrate tolerances.2.Sequence of installation or erection.3.Required installation tolerances.4.



Page 7 of 8

Required adjustments.5.Recommendations for cleaning and protection.6.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW3.1

Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and forA.compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Markwith approval stamp before submitting to Architect/Engineer.

Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include ProjectB.name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name ofreviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has beenreviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

ARCHITECT/ENGINEER’S ACTION3.2

General: Architect/Engineer will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor'sA.approval stamp and will return them without action.

Informational Submittals: Architect/Engineer will review each submittal and will not returnB.it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward eachsubmittal to appropriate party.

Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered non-responsive, and will beC.returned without review.

Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may beD.discarded.




Page 8 of 8

SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assuranceA.and quality control.

Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirementsB.specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility forcompliance with the Contract Document requirements.

Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction1.activities are specified on the drawings.Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other2.quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with theContract Document requirements.Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services3.required by Architect/Engineer, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are notlimited by provisions of this Section.

Related Sections include the following:C.

Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a1.schedule of required tests and inspections.

DEFINITIONS1.3

Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before andA.during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiatethat proposed construction will comply with requirements.

Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during andB.after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Workand completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contractenforcement activities performed by Architect/Engineer.

Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or aC.testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.

Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source,D.i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop.


QUALITY REQUIREMENTSSection 01400

Page 1 of 5

Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site forE.installation of the Work and for completed Work.

Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both.F.Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as anG.employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular constructionoperation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction1.activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of acorresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply thatrequirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the correspondinggeneric name.

Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfullyH.completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project;being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied withrequirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS1.4

General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standardsA.establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels,comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements thatare different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specifiedB.shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactlywith the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum withinreasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values areminimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Referuncertainties to Architect/Engineer for a decision before proceeding.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.5

General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualificationA.levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, orB.assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project,whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-serviceperformance.

Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systemsC.similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-serviceperformance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to thoseD.indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as wellas sufficient production capacity to produce required units.



Page 2 of 5

Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified toE.practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providingengineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as thoseperformed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to thoseindicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with theF.experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documentedaccording to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individualSections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable toauthorities.

NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.1.NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary2.Laboratory Accreditation Program.

Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representativeG.of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation ofmanufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicatedfor this Project.

QUALITY CONTROL1.6

Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner'sA.responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of1.testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspectingthey are engaged to perform.Payment for these services will be made directly to the Testing Agency by the2.Owner.Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated3.by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged toContractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect/Engineer and Contractor inB.performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests andinspections.

Notify Architect/Engineer and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies1.observed in the Work during performance of its services.Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ2.tests are conducted.Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether3.tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar4.quality-control service through Contractor.Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or5.approve or accept any portion of the Work.Do not perform any duties of Contractor.6.

Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections,C.and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as



Page 3 of 5

requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment ofpersonnel. Provide the following:

Access to the Work.1.Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.2.Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing3.and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.4.Delivery of samples to testing agencies.5.Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control6.by testing agency.Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at7.Project site.

Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-D.assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity ofremoving and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.1.

Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similarE.quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 10days of date established for commencement of the Work.

Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect/Engineer, testing agencies,1.and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests andinspections are required.


EXECUTIONPART 3 -

TEST AND INSPECTION LOG3.1

Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:A.

Date test or inspection was conducted.1.Description of the Work tested or inspected.2.Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.3.Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.4.

Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. ProvideB.access to test and inspection log for Architect/Engineer's reference during normalworking hours.

REPAIR AND PROTECTION3.2

General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repairA.damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other1.



Page 4 of 5

Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration intoadjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting2.and Patching."

Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.B.

Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment ofC.responsibility for quality-control services.




Page 5 of 5

SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES

GENERALPART 1 -



DEFINITIONS1.2

General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.A.

"Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals,B.applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilitiesas stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

"Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"C."authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaningas "directed."

"Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form onD.Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including"shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

"Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities havingE.jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry thatcontrol performance of the Work.

"Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,F.installation, and similar operations.

"Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,G.assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing,curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

"Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.H.

"Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent ofI.Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description ofthe land on which Project is to be built.

INDUSTRY STANDARDS1.3

Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringentA.requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effectas if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced.Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the ContractB.


REFERENCESSection 01420

Page 1 of 2

Documents, unless otherwise indicated.

Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiarC.with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicablestandards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction1.activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.





REFERENCESSection 01420

Page 2 of 2

SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection ofA.products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers'standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; andcomparable products.


Division 01 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products1.specified.Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract2.closeout.

DEFINITIONS1.3

Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased forA.Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms"material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including1.make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer'spublished product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another2.project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materialsare allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycledfrom other projects are not considered new products.

Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of constructionB.from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

SUBMITTALS1.4

Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. IdentifyA.product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Sectionnumber and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the1.following, as applicable:


PRODUCT REQUIREMENTSSection 01600

Page 1 of 6

Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot bea.provided.Coordination information, including a list of changes or modificationsb.needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed byOwner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodateproposed substitution.Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution withc.those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributessuch as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specificfeatures and requirements indicated.Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products andd.fabrication and installation procedures.Samples, where applicable or requested.e.List of similar installations for completed projects with project names andf.addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating andg.interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code inh.effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable toauthorities having jurisdiction.Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule usingi.proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, includingeffect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method ofconstruction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letterfrom manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack ofavailability or delays in delivery.Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contractj.Sum.Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies withk.requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate forapplications indicated.Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that mayl.subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposedsubstitution to produce indicated results.

Architect/Engineer’s Action: If necessary, Architect/Engineer will request2.additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt ofa request for substitution. Architect/Engineer will notify Contractor of acceptanceor rejection of proposed substitution within 10 days of receipt of request, or 7days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

Form of Acceptance: Change Order.a.Use product specified if Architect/Engineer cannot make a decision onb.use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.


Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or moreA.products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with productspreviously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods1.compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.



Page 2 of 6

If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but2.incompatible products, Architect/Engineer will determine which products shall beused.

PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.6

Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,A.deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

Delivery and Handling:B.

Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent1.overcrowding of construction spaces.Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for2.items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive todeterioration, theft, and other losses.Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's3.original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels andinstructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents4.and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

Storage:C.

Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting1.of units.Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.2.Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a3.weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to preventcondensation.Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.4.Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for5.period of installation and concealment.Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature,6.humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.7.Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials8.and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

PRODUCT WARRANTIES1.7

Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with,A.other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers andlimitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations underrequirements of the Contract Documents.

Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual1.manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturerto Owner.Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract2.Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or toprovide more rights for Owner.



Page 3 of 6

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES2.1

General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the ContractA.Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time ofinstallation.

Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other1.items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard2.options are specified, provide standard products of types that have beenproduced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in3.conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect/Engineer4.will make selection.Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the5.Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products.Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term6."or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part2 "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamedproduct.

Product Selection Procedures:B.

Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide1.the named product that complies with requirements.Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or2.source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complieswith requirements.Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and3.manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies withrequirements.Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names,4.provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies withrequirements.Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both5.products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamedproduct, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers,6.provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamedmanufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and7.dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product orsystem, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product orsystem.Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a8.list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by



Page 4 of 6

one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicatesizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on theproduct named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Articlefor consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers.

PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS2.2

Timing: Architect/Engineer will consider requests for substitution if received within 7 daysA.after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered orrejected at discretion of Architect.

Conditions: Architect/Engineer will consider Contractor's request for substitution whenB.the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,Architect/Engineer will return requests without action, except to record noncompliancewith these requirements:

Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time,1.energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additionalresponsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities mayinclude compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services,increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract2.Documents.Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will3.produce indicated results.Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.4.Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction5.Schedule.Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having6.jurisdiction.Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.7.Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.8.Requested substitution provides specified warranty.9.If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested10.substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform andconsistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractorsinvolved.

COMPARABLE PRODUCTS2.3

Conditions: Architect/Engineer will consider Contractor's request for comparable productA.when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,Architect/Engineer will return requests without action, except to record noncompliancewith these requirements:

Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the1.Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and willproduce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of theWork.Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those2.named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such asperformance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features andrequirements indicated.



Page 5 of 6

Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.3.List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and4.addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.Samples, if requested.5.





Page 6 of 6

SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

GENERALPART 1 -


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryA.Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.1.

Related Requirements:B.

Section 01100 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-1.occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.Section 01700 "Execution Requirements" for cutting and patching procedures.2.

DEFINITIONS1.3

Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-siteA.unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner toB.prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.

Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, andC.reinstall where indicated.

Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanentlyD.removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, orremoved and reinstalled.

MATERIALS OWNERSHIP1.4

Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.A.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.5

Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.A.Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by OwnerB.as far as practical.


SELECTIVE DEMOLITIONSection 01732

Page 1 of 4

Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings beforeC.proceeding with selective demolition.

Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered inD.the Work.

If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately1.notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Ownerunder a separate contract.

Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.E.

Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect themF.against damage during selective demolition operations.

Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.1.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS2.1

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations beforeA.beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations ofauthorities having jurisdiction.

Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.B.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selectiveA.demolition operations.

Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does notB.guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.

Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extentC.of selective demolition required.

When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict withD.intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature andextent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS3.2

Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remainA.and protect them against damage.



Page 2 of 4

Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in1.Section 01100 "Summary."

PREPARATION3.3

Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removalA.operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, andother adjacent occupied and used facilities.

Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015001."Temporary Facilities and Controls."

Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required toB.prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition1.area and to and from occupied portions of building.Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective2.demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, toprevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or3.that are exposed during selective demolition operations.Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been4.removed.Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and5.cooling specified in Section 01500 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL3.4

General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by newA.construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work withinlimitations of governing regulations and as follows:

Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level.1.Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier beforedisturbing supporting members on the next lower level.Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required.2.Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoiningconstruction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing orgrinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacentsurfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid3.marring existing finished surfaces.Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At4.concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contentsof hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.5.Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable6.materials and promptly dispose of off-site.Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to7.avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.



Page 3 of 4

Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as8.not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end-of-Project ratesB.for reuse of building elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements beyondwhat is indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval.

Removed and Reinstalled Items:C.

Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.1.Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.2.Protect items from damage during transport and storage.3.Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for4.new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, andmiscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage andD.soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removedto a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition[ and cleaned] andreinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS3.5

General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, orA.otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials fromProject site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.1.Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent2.surfaces and areas.Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device3.that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose ofB.them.

CLEANING3.6

Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selectiveA.demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selectivedemolition operations began.




Page 4 of 4

SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,A.including, but not limited to, the following:

Inspection procedures.1.Final cleaning.2.


Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for1.Payment for Substantial and Final Completion.Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project2.site.Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings,3.Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.

SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION1.3

Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of SubstantialA.Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of1.items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and2.access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operatingcertificates, and similar releases.Prepare and submit Project Record Documents,, damage or settlement surveys,3.property surveys, and similar final record information.Complete final cleaning requirements.4.Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate5.visual defects.

Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. OnB.receipt of request, Architect/Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notifyContractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect/Engineer will prepare the Certificate ofSubstantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either onContractor's list or additional items identified by Architect/Engineer, that must becompleted or corrected before certificate will be issued.

Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous1.


CLOSEOUT PROCEDURESSection 01770

Page 1 of 3

inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final2.Completion.

FINAL COMPLETION1.4

Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of FinalA.Completion, complete the following:

Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment1.Procedures."Submit certified copy of Architect/Engineer's Substantial Completion inspection2.list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated byArchitect/Engineer. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item hasbeen completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with3.insurance requirements.

Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt ofB.request, Architect/Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor ofunfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment afterinspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or correctedbefore certificate will be issued.

Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous1.inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)1.5

Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each spaceA.and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needingcorrection including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside thelimits of construction.

Include the following information at the top of each page:1.

Project name.a.Date.b.Name of Architect/Engineer.c.Name of Contractor.d.Page number.e.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

(NOT USED)



Page 2 of 3

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

FINAL CLEANING3.1

General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations toA.comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental andantipollution regulations.

Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning.B.

Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for1.certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by constructiona.activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, wastematerial, litter, and other foreign substances.Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains,b.and other foreign deposits.Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-c.textured surface.Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus materiald.from Project site.Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-freee.condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoiddisturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces.Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.f.

Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not buryC.debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, ordangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project siteand dispose of lawfully.




Page 3 of 3

SECTION 01783 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project RecordA.Documents, including the following:

Record Drawings.1.


Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.1.

SUBMITTALS1.3

Record Drawings: Comply with the following:A.

Number of Copies: Submit two set(s) of marked-up Record Prints.1.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

RECORD DRAWINGS2.1

Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the ContractA.Drawings and Shop Drawings.

Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation1.varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtainedrecord data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similarentity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints.

Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that woulda.be difficult to identify or measure and record later.Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.b.Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and checkc.the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the2.following:

Dimensional changes to Drawings.a.


PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTSSection 01783

Page 1 of 2

Revisions to details shown on Drawings.b.Locations and depths of underground utilities.c.Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.d.Changes made by Change Order or Change Directive.e.Changes made following Architect/Engineer's written orders.f.Details not on the original Contract Drawings.g.Field records for variable and concealed conditions.h.Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.i.

Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of3.showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawingsare marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to4.distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at samelocation.Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or5.omitted from original Drawings.Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order6.numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECTB.RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings1.into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Includeidentification on cover sheets.Identification: As follows:2.

Project name.a.Date.b.Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."c.Name of Architect/Engineer.d.Name of Contractor.e.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE3.1

Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period forA.Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project RecordDocuments as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents andB.Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Donot use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain RecordDocuments in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected fromdeterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents forArchitect/Engineer's reference during normal working hours.



PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTSSection 01783

Page 2 of 2

SECTION 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Wood blocking and nailers.1.Plywood backing panels.2.

DEFINITIONS1.3

Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inchesA.nominal in least dimension.

Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include theB.following:

NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.1.NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association.2.NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.3.SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.4.WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.5.WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.6.


Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking forA.fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing theclassification marking is representative of the material tested.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.5

Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide airA.circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securelyanchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -


MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRYSection 06105

Page 1 of 7

WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL2.1

Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no gradingA.agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by anagency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under therules indicated.

Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.1.For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade2.stamp on end or back of each piece.Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 203.for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they areminimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.4.

Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less,B.19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.

WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS2.2

Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interiorA.construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior constructionnot in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with theground.

Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and1.containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sillplates.For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical2.formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, orotherwise adversely affect finishes.

Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not useB.material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSCC.Board of Review.

For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or1.back of each piece.

Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:D.

Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and1.similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, andwaterproofing.Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact2.with masonry or concrete.Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior3.masonry or concrete walls.Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawl4.



Page 2 of 7

spaces or unexcavated areas.Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.5.

FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS2.3

General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complyingA.with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, andwith fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identicalproducts per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with aB.flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with noevidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond thecenterline of the burners at any time during the test.

Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.1.Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above2.for fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after beingsubjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use forexterior locations and where indicated.Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or3.less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity.Use where exterior type is not indicated.Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according4.ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculatedaccording to ASTM D 6841.

Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dryC.plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing andD.inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or1.back of each piece.

For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemicalE.formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affectfinishes.

Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:F.

Concealed blocking.1.Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar2.members in connection with roofing.Plywood backing panels.3.

MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER2.4

General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachmentA.of other construction, including the following:



Page 3 of 7

Blocking.1.Nailers.2.Cants.3.Furring.4.Grounds.5.

For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber and anyB.of the following species:

Hem-fir (north); NLGA.1.Mixed southern pine; SPIB.2.Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.3.Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.4.Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.5.

For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content andC.any of the following species and grades:

Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.1.Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB,2.or WWPA.Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Construction or No. 2 Common grade;3.NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 gradeD.lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminatedefects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumberE.to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with noF.knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS2.5

Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, C-C Plugged, fire-retardant treated, inA.thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than [1/2-inch] [3/4-inch] nominalthickness.

FASTENERS2.6

General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirementsA.specified in this article for material and manufacture.

Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative1.treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fastenersof Type 304stainless steel.

Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.B.

Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.C.



Page 4 of 7

Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.D.

Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002, length as recommended byE.screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.F.

Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and,G.where indicated, flat washers.

Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below withH.capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed wheninstalled in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed wheninstalled in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualifiedindependent testing and inspecting agency.

Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and1.ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS2.7

Adhesives for Gluing Furring to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTMA.D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.

Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable,B.butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film,aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than0.025 inch.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION, GENERAL3.1

Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, andA.fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply withrequirements for attaching other construction.

Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, installB.continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional WoodC.Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilitiesD.requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels withclassification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.E.



Page 5 of 7

Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials,F.fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and1.intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fasteningedges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.

Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities asG.indicated and as follows:

Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more1.than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materialsaccurately fitted to close furred spaces.Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor2.level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fireblocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid woodblocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal thickness.Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as3.sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fillspace below partitions.Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not4.more than 20 feet o.c.

Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation orH.with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interferewith function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number ofjoints or optimum joint arrangement.

Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treatedI.lumber.

Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.1.Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.2.

Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,J.complying with the following:

NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.1.Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.2.

Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will notK.fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finishmaterials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splittingwood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.

WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION3.2

Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. FormA.to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work.Coordinate locations with other work involved.

Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush withB.surfaces unless otherwise indicated.



Page 6 of 7

Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveledC.lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of groundto exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longerrequired.

PROTECTION3.3

Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection,A.miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.




Page 7 of 7

SECTION 06412 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.1.Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-2.faced architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction beforecabinet installation.


Product Data: For each type of product, including high-pressure decorative laminateA.cabinet hardware and accessories.

Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer1.and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply withrequirements.

Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-B.scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

Show details full size.1.Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including2.concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets3.installed in architectural plastic-laminate cabinets.

Samples for Verification:C.

Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.1.Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.2.


Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricateA.products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record ofsuccessful in-service performance.

Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.B.


PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACEDARCHITECTURAL CABINETS


Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking forC.fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing theclassification marking is representative of the material tested.


Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodworkA.have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other thaninstallation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply withrequirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.6

Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed,A.wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperaturebetween 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during theremainder of the construction period.

Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verifyB.dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicatemeasurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with constructionprogress to avoid delaying the Work.

Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by1.field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on ShopDrawings.

Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction,C.establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimmingat site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond toestablished dimensions.

COORDINATION1.7

Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and otherA.related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can besupported and installed as indicated.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS2.1

Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural WoodworkA.Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction,finishes, installation, and other requirements.

The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality1.standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard.




Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the qualitystandard.

Grade: Custom .B.

Type of Construction: Frameless .C.

Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay .D.

High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated,E.as required by woodwork quality standard.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by1.the following:

Formica Corporation.a.

Laminate Type PL-1: 7288-58 Ginger Root Maple.1)Laminate Type PL-2: 909-58 Black.2)

Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:F.

Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS .1.Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.2.Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS .3.Edges: Grade VGS .4.Pattern Direction: As indicated.5.

Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:G.

Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels.1.

Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch thick,a.matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.Edges of Thermoset Decorative Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edgeb.banding.For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminatec.surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMALD 3, Grade VGS.

Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester2.edge banding.Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels.3.

Dust Panels: 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments andH.drawers unless located directly under tops.

Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressureI.decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.

Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mountingJ.screws from interior of body.

Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by1.mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints.




WOOD MATERIALS2.2

Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced qualityA.standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwiseindicated.

Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.1.

Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply withB.requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality gradespecified unless otherwise indicated.

Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.1.Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea2.formaldehyde.Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay.3.Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard4.finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper andcomplying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3,3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.

CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES2.3

General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated withA.architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 08712 "Door Hardware(Descriptive Specification)."

Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees ofB.opening.

Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter.C.

Catches: Push-in magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03131.D.

Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal, two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip.E.

Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.F.

Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-overtravel-extension1.type; zinc-plated-steel ball-bearing slides.For drawers more than 3 inches high but not more than 6 inches high and not2.more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-100.For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 inches wide, provide3.Grade 1HD-200.

Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.G.

Surface-Mounted Countertop Support Brackets:H.

Manufacturer/Supplier: www.supportbrackets.com1.Product: Work Station Brackets.2.




For 18 inch deep counters: 8 by 12 inches; white.a.For 24 inch deep counters: 15 by 21 inches; white.b.For 30 inch deep counters: 24 by 24 inches; white.c.

Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies withI.BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.1.

For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies withJ.product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.


Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber,A.kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.B.

Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for1.faces.

FABRICATION2.5

Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.A.

Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extentB.possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary forshipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowancefor scribing, trimming, and fitting.

Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely1.assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fasteningdevices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit asintended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurementsbefore disassembling for shipment.

Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances,C.electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates orroughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges ofcutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

PREPARATION3.1

Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions inA.installation areas.




Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and completeB.work as required.

INSTALLATION3.2

Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.A.

Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was notB.completed in the shop.

Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.C.Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damagedD.finish at cuts.

Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. SecureE.with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails orfinishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.

Use filler matching finish of items being installed.1.

Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and areF.accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and toprovide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessoryitems as indicated.

Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation1.from a straight line.Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more2.than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING3.3

Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional andA.visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniformappearance.

Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.B.

Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.C.





SECTION 06417 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section includes plastic-laminate countertops.A.


Product Data: For each type of product.A.

Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-B.scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

Samples for Verification:C.

Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.1.


Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking forA.fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing theclassification marking is representative of the material tested.


Do not deliver countertops until painting and similar operations that could damageA.countertops have been completed in installation areas. If countertops must be stored inother than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions complywith requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.6

Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed,A.wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperaturebetween 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during theremainder of the construction period.

Field Measurements: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verifyB.dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate


PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPSSection 06417

Page 1 of 4

measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with constructionprogress to avoid delaying the Work.

Established Dimensions: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction,C.establish dimensions for areas where countertops are to fit. Provide allowance fortrimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensionscorrespond to established dimensions.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS2.1

Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural WoodworkA.Standards" for grades indicated for construction, installation, and other requirements.

The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality1.standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard.Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the qualitystandard.

Grade: Custom .B.

High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS.C.

See Section 06412 "Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets" for list of1.Laminate Types.

Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces .D.

Core Thickness: 3/4 inch .E.

Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches at front, back, and ends with1.additional layers of core material laminated to top.

WOOD MATERIALS2.2

Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced qualityA.standard unless otherwise indicated.

Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.1.

Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply withB.requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality gradespecified unless otherwise indicated.

Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.1.Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea2.formaldehyde.Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.3.




Page 2 of 4

Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.A.

Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for1.faces.

See Section 06412 "Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets" for list of HardwareB.and Accessories.

FABRICATION2.4

Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front andA.end overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets. Ease edges to radius indicated for thefollowing:

Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated.1.

Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipmentB.to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment andinstallation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing,trimming, and fitting.

Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely1.assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fasteningdevices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit asintended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurementsbefore disassembling for shipment.

Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive appliances, plumbing fixtures,C.electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates orroughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges ofcutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

PREPARATION3.1

Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions inA.installation areas.

Before installing countertops, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and completeB.work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

INSTALLATION3.2

Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed.A.

Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it wasB.not completed in the shop.

Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar1.



Page 3 of 4

items.

Field Jointing: Where possible, make in the same manner as shop jointing, usingC.dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepareedges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is notrequired. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings.

Secure field joints in plastic-laminate countertops with concealed clamping1.devices located within 6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals notexceeding 24 inches. Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions toexert a constant, heavy-clamping pressure at joints.

Install countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealedD.shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repairE.damaged finish at cuts.

Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets orF.other supports into underside of countertop.

Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other1.variation from a straight line.Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive.2.Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant3.or another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertopmaterial manufacturer.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING3.3

Repair damaged and defective countertops, where possible, to eliminate functional andA.visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniformappearance.

Clean countertops on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-appliedB.finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.




Page 4 of 4

SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Silicone joint sealants.1.Latex joint sealants.2.


Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.A.

Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:B.

Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.1.Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.2.Joint-sealant formulation.3.Joint-sealant color.4.


Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained andA.approved for installation of units required for this Project.

Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from singleB.manufacturer.

PROJECT CONDITIONS1.5

Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:A.

When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted1.by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.When joint substrates are wet.2.Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for3.applications indicated.Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been4.removed from joint substrates.


JOINT SEALANTSSection 07920

Page 1 of 6

WARRANTY1.6

Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees toA.repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and otherrequirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.1.

Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealantB.manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do notcomply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section withinspecified warranty period.

Warranty Period: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion.1.

Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealantsC.from the following:

Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable1.to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealantmanufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design2.specifications.Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.3.Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other4.atmospheric contaminants.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MATERIALS, GENERAL2.1

Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that areA.compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service andapplication, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and fieldexperience.

Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's fullB.range.

SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS2.2

Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant:A.ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may1.be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

Pecora Corporation; 898.a.



Page 2 of 6

LATEX JOINT SEALANTS2.3

Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP,A.Grade NF.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the1.following:

BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.a.Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600.b.May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex 600 or Bondaflex Sil-A 700.c.Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.d.Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200.e.Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.f.

JOINT SEALANT BACKING2.4

General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible withA.joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved forapplications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratorytesting.

Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surfaceB.skin),, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute toproducing optimum sealant performance.

Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealantC.manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materialsor joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required forA.adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstructionjoint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers ofB.sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capableof staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, andformulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants andC.surfaces adjacent to joints.



Page 3 of 6

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for complianceA.with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditionsaffecting joint-sealant performance.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.B.

PREPARATION3.2

Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants toA.comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the followingrequirements:

Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with1.adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protectivecoatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealantmanufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents,water, surface dirt, and frost.Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical2.abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, soundsubstrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Removeloose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming orblowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates includethe following:

Concrete.a.Masonry.b.Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.c.Exterior insulation and finish systems.d.

Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.3.Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means4.that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering withadhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

Metal.a.Glass.b.Porcelain enamel.c.Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.d.

Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturerB.or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Applyprimer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primersto areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primerC.with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by



Page 4 of 6

such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tapeimmediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS3.3

General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions forA.products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use ofB.joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and atC.position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealantsrelative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.1.Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.2.Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant3.application and replace them with dry materials.

Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used betweenD.sealants and backs of joints.

Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the sameE.time backings are installed:

Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.1.Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.2.Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that3.allow optimum sealant movement capability.

Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning orF.curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs belowto form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and toensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.1.Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that2.do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise3.indicated.Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.4.Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated5.per Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.

Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.a.

CLEANING3.4

Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses byA.methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of jointsealants and of products in which joints occur.



Page 5 of 6

PROTECTION3.5

Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminatingA.substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes sosealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged ordeteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas areindistinguishable from original work.

JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE3.6

Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontrafficA.surfaces.

Joint Locations:1.

Perimeter joints between materials and frames of doors.a.

Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Class 50.2.Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of3.colors.

Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontrafficB.surfaces.

Joint Locations:1.

Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.a.Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interiorb.doors.

Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Class 50.2.Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of3.colors.




Page 6 of 6

SECTION 09111 - NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.1.Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.2.



PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS2.1

STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and constructionA.identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classifiedaccording to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

FRAMING SYSTEMS2.2

Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.A.

Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal1.unless otherwise indicated.Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A2.653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.

Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.B.

Steel Studs and Runners:1.

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch.a.Depth: As indicated on Drawings .b.

Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:C.

Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch-1.


NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMINGSection 09111

Page 1 of 6

deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs,and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of2.finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structureabove; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width toaccommodate depth of studs.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of thea.following:

Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track.1)MBA Building Supplies; Slotted Deflecto Track.2)Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series.3)Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).4)Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track.5)

Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and widthD.indicated.

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch.1.

Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, withE.minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.

Depth: 1-1/2 inches.1.Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized2.steel.

Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.F.

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm).1.Depth: As indicated on Drawings.2.

Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduceG.sound transmission.

Configuration: Asymmetrical.1.

Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-H.inch- wide flanges.

Depth: As indicated on Drawings.1.Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum2.uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch.Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-3.diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.

Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wallI.attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch, anddepth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

SUSPENSION SYSTEMS2.3



Page 2 of 6

Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameterA.wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.

Hanger Attachments to Concrete:B.

Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for1.attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to[5] <Insert number> times that imposed by construction as determined bytesting according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency.

Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor.a.

Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch inC.diameter.

Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness ofD.0.053 inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.

Depth: 2-1/2 inches.1.

Furring Channels (Furring Members):E.

Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-1.inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep.Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep members designed to reduce sound2.transmission.

Configuration: Asymmetrical.a.

Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung systemF.composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.


Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.a.Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System.b.USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.c.

AUXILIARY MATERIALS2.4

General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.A.

Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance,1.holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members tosubstrates.

Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:B.

Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),1.nonperforated.



Page 3 of 6

Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener2.penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel studsize.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metalA.frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements andother conditions affecting performance of the Work.


PREPARATION3.2

Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installationA.of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages tobuilding structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to supportthe Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.


Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.A.

Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that1.apply to framing installation.

Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services,B.heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.C.

Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framingD.members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES3.4

Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater thanA.spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.1.Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.2.

Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals atB.exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.C.



Page 4 of 6

Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height toD.structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions areindicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetratingpartitions above ceiling.

Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door1.frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jambstuds.

Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.a.Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimumb.1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control jointin finished assembly.Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to undersidec.of overhead structure.

Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same2.as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing belowsills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

Direct Furring:E.

Screw to wood framing.1.Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry2.attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

Z-Furring Members:F.

Erect insulation, specified in Section 07210 "Building Insulation," vertically and1.hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to2.wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, orpowder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short3.flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach shortflange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, spacesecond member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.

Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not moreG.than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS3.5

Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greaterA.than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

Hangers: 48 inches o.c.1.Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c.2.Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c.3.

Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated byB.building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.



Page 5 of 6

Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:C.

Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within1.ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offseta.resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equallyeffective means.

Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces2.hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to supportstandard suspension system members, install supplemental suspensionmembers and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceilinga.loads within performance limits established by referenced installationstandards.

Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or3.to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure andappropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers todeteriorate or otherwise fail.Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.4.Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger5.inserts that extend through forms.Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.6.Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.7.

Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspensionD.systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furringmembers to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12E.feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transverselybetween parallel members that will receive finishes.




Page 6 of 6

SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Interior gypsum board.1.



DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING1.4

Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,A.condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage.Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.5

Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum boardA.manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed andB.conditioned.

Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that areC.mold damaged.

Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited1.to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or2.splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -



GYPSUM BOARDSection 09250

Page 1 of 6

Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provideA.materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according toASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL2.2

Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in eachA.area and that correspond with support system indicated.

INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD2.3

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of theA.following:

American Gypsum.1.CertainTeed Corp.2.Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.3.Lafarge North America Inc.4.National Gypsum Company.5.PABCO Gypsum.6.Temple-Inland.7.USG Corporation.8.

Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.B.

Thickness: 5/8 inch.1.Long Edges: Tapered.2.

TRIM ACCESSORIES2.4

Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.A.

Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or1.paper-faced galvanized steel sheet.Shapes:2.

Cornerbead.a.LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.b.Expansion (control) joint.c.

JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS2.5

General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.A.

Joint Tape:B.

Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.1.Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.2.Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.3.Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.4.



Page 2 of 6

Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that isC.compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping1.compound.Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints,2.fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trima.accessories.

Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.3.Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.4.Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping5.compound.

AUXILIARY MATERIALS2.6

General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standardsA.and manufacturer's written recommendations.

Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adheringB.gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.C.

Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members1.from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size2.recommended by panel manufacturer.

Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)D.produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured fromglass, slag wool, or rock wool.

Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of1.assembly.

Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latexE.sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne soundtransmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction asdemonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant.a.Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC.b.Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR or AIS-919.c.Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.d.USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.e.



Page 3 of 6

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, withA.Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affectingperformance.

Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, andB.mold damaged.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.C.

APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL3.2

Comply with ASTM C 840.A.

Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and toB.avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints ofadjacent panels not less than one framing member.

Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges andC.ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force intoplace.

Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications whereD.intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Donot place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on oppositesides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framedopenings.

Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsumE.panels.

Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (aboveF.ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or1.smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq.ft. in area.Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.2.Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of3.floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structuralmembers; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structuralG.abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations andtrim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints betweenedges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.



Page 4 of 6

Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel isH.attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets areI.readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD3.3

Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:A.

Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated.1.

Single-Layer Application:B.

On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to1.greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwiseindicated.On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless2.otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimizeend joints.

Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member ina.alternate courses of panels.At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unlessb.otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with3.no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.4.

Multilayer Application:C.

On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base1.layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply baselayers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framingmember, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwiseindicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers2.vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud orfurring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring memberwith base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face3.layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular toframing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edgejoints of base layer over furring members.Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports4.with screws.

Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to aD.substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board),comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarilybrace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.



Page 5 of 6

INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES3.4

General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with sameA.fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's writteninstructions.

Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locationsB.approved by Architect for visual effect.

Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:C.

Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.1.LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.2.

FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD3.5

General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,A.penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to preparegypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound fromadjacent surfaces.

Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.B.

Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicatedC.as not intended to receive tape.

Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according toD.ASTM C 840:

Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.1.Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise2.indicated.

PROTECTION3.6

Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors andA.other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damagedduring drywall application.

Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,B.construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.C.

Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited1.to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or2.splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.




Page 6 of 6

SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.A.

Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and otherB.ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete.



Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finishB.required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern,1.and texture.Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch- long2.Samples of each type, finish, and color.


Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the followingA.items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the itemsinvolved:

Suspended ceiling components.1.Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.2.Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels.3.Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:4.

Lighting fixtures.a.Air outlets and inlets.b.Speakers.c.Sprinklers.d.Access panels.e.

Perimeter moldings.5.


ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGSSection 09511

Page 1 of 7

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS1.5

Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.A.


Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to ProjectA.site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned spacewhere they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperatureextremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and aB.stabilized moisture content.

Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.C.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.7

Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces areA.enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilingsis complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at thelevels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours1.before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -


Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquakeA.motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testingB.agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.1.Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.2.

ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL2.2

Source Limitations:A.

Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single1.manufacturer.Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single2.manufacturer.



Page 2 of 7

Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supportingB.suspension system from single source from single manufacturer.

Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.C.

Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configurationD.indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns,acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.

Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which1.face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTME 795.

Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated forE.each product type.

Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by1.referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers'proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect fromeach manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type,pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.

ACOUSTICAL PANELS 2.3

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ArmstrongA.World Industries, Inc.; Dune-1774, or comparable product by one of the following:

CertainTeed Corp.1.USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.2.

Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and patternB.as follows:

Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted.1.Pattern: CE (perforated, small holes and lightly textured).2.

Color: White .C.

Edge/Joint Detail: Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-system members.D.

Thickness: 5/8 inch.E.

Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches .F.

Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acousticalG.panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus,mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold,mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluatedaccording to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.

METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL2.4



Page 3 of 7

Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metalA.suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that complywith applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.

Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/CB.635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic designrequirements.

Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes1.or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain,without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, asdetermined by testing according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable,conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

Type: Postinstalled expansion anchors.a.Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTMb.F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316 for bolts; Alloy 304 or316 for anchor.

Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for2.application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips orother accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and withcapability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed byceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190,conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the followingC.requirements:

Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating,1.soft temper.Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM2.C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, butprovide not less than 0.135-inch- diameter wire.

Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed toD.accommodate seismic forces.

Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodateE.seismic forces.

Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secureF.acoustical panels in place.

METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM 2.5

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ArmstrongA.World Industries, Inc.; Prelude ML 15/16-inch Exposed Tee, or comparable product byone of the following:

CertainTeed Corp.1.USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.2.



Page 4 of 7

Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Hot-Dip Galvanized, G60, Steel Suspension System:B.Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; hot-dip galvanizedaccording to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation; with prefinished, cold-rolled,15/16-inch- wide aluminum caps on flanges.

Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system.1.Face Design: Flat, flush.2.Face Finish: Painted white .3.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to whichA.acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance withrequirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation andanchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditionsaffecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.

Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet,B.moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


PREPARATION3.2

Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance borderA.widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels atborders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

INSTALLATION3.3

General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M andA.seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructionsand CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:B.

Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within1.ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspensionsystem.Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting2.horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces3.hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required tosupport standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspensionmembers and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck.4.Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical oradhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into



Page 5 of 7

concrete.When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing5.required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachmentof hanger wires.Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.6.Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.7.Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported8.directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than8 inches from ends of each member.Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads9.within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum ofC.four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required forhangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs.Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling areaD.and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and1.not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to atolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.2.

Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with oneE.another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-F.system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrationsto provide a neat, precise fit.

Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:1.

Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to short axisa.of space.

For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by2.flanges of suspension-system runners and moldings.For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with3.bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system members with box-shaped4.flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension-system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners.Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of5.exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purposeby acoustical panel manufacturer.

CLEANING3.4

Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, andA.suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions forcleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components



Page 6 of 7

that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence ofdamage.




Page 7 of 7

SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Rubber floor tile.1.

Related Sections:B.

Section 09653 "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer1.strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings.


Product Data: For each type of product indicated.A.

Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns,B.doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

Show details of special patterns.1.

Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.C.


Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.A.


Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, withA.ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but notless than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.


Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not lessA.than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the followingtime periods:


RESILIENT FLOOR TILESection 09651

Page 1 of 4

48 hours before installation.1.During installation.2.48 hours after installation.3.

Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommendedB.by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.C.

Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.D.

Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.E.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

RUBBER FLOOR TILE (RBF-2) 2.1

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:A.

Johnsonite; Raised Round Disc, color LC6 Nightowl.1.

Seaming Method: Standard.B.

INSTALLATION MATERIALS2.2

Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement basedA.or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturerfor applications indicated.

Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile andB.substrate conditions indicated.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements forA.maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specifiedB.in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, andforeign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.


PREPARATION3.2



Page 2 of 4

Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion ofA.resilient products.

Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.B.

Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and1.hardeners.Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with2.adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methodsrecommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.3.Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows.4.Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed witha.installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emissionrate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patchingC.compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to beD.installed.

Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be1.installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediatelyE.before installation.

FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION3.3

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.A.

Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minorB.offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary toavoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

Lay tiles square with room axis.1.

Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the sameC.sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked,chipped, or deformed tiles.

Lay tiles with grain running in one direction.1.

Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanentD.fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. ExtendE.floor tiles to center of door openings.



Page 3 of 4

Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for futureF.cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or othernonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied toG.substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising andpuckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surfaceimperfections.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION3.4

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.A.

Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:B.

Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.1.Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.2.Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.3.

Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage fromC.construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder ofconstruction period.

Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.D.




Page 4 of 4

SECTION 09652 - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Rubber sheet floor covering, without backing.1.

Related Sections:B.

Section 09651 "Resilient Floor Tile" for resilient floor tile.1.Section 09653 "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer2.strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings.



Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts, locationsB.of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets,and cutouts.

Show details of special patterns.1.

Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inchC.sections of each different color and pattern of floor covering required.


Maintenance Data: For each type of floor covering to include in maintenance manuals.A.


Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who areA.competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installationindicated.

Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or1.certified by floor covering manufacturer for installation techniques required.


RESILIENT SHEET FLOORINGSection 09652

Page 1 of 4


Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather,A.with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, butnot less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store rolls upright.


Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not lessA.than 70 deg F or more than 85 deg F, in spaces to receive floor coverings during thefollowing time periods:



Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.C.

Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.D.

Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have beenE.completed.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

RUBBER SHEET FLOOR COVERING (RBF-1) 2.1


ECOsurfaces; ECOnights, color 626 Total Eclipse, 3.2 mm roll.1.

Seaming Method: Standard.B.



Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor coveringB.and substrate conditions indicated.



Page 2 of 4

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1


Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specifiedB.in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, andforeign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings.


PREPARATION3.2

Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion ofA.floor coverings.

Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.B.

Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and1.hardeners.Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with2.adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methodsrecommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.3.Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows.4.Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed witha.installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emissionrate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patchingC.compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are toD.be installed.

Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be1.installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately beforeE.installation.

FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION3.3

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings.A.



Page 3 of 4

Unroll floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.B.

Lay out floor coverings as follows:C.

Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction.1.Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas,2.at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates.Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams.3.Avoid cross seams.4.

Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanentD.fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.E.

Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for futureF.cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or othernonpermanent marking device.

Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items inG.installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of floorcoverings installed on covers and adjoining floor covering. Tightly adhere floor coveringedges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrateH.to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering atjoints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.


Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floorA.coverings.

Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation:B.

Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces.1.Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly.2.Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil.3.

Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage fromC.construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder ofconstruction period.

Cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion.D.




Page 4 of 4

SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Resilient base.1.

Related Sections:B.

Section 09651 "Resilient Floor Tile for resilient floor tile."1.



Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-B.size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture,and pattern required.


Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from theA.weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended bymanufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.


Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not lessA.than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during thefollowing time periods:



Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have beenC.completed.


RESILIENT WALL BASE ANDACCESSORIES


PRODUCTSPART 2 -

RESILIENT BASE 2.1

Resilient Base:A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by1.one of the following:

Allstate Rubber Corp.; Stoler Industries.a.Armstrong World Industries, Inc.b.Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.c.Endura Rubber Flooring; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.d.Estrie Products International; American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd.e.Flexco, Inc.f.Johnsonite.g.Mondo Rubber International, Inc.h.Musson, R. C. Rubber Co.i.Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.j.PRF USA, Inc.k.Roppe Corporation, USA.l.VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.m.

Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.B.

Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset).1.Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous) .2.Style: Cove (base with toe) and Straight (flat or toeless) .3.

Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.C.

Height: As indicated on Drawings.D.

Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.E.

Outside Corners: Job formed Job formed or preformed.F.

Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.G.

Finish: Low luster.H.

Colors and Patterns: As indicated on Drawings.I.



Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient productsB.and substrate conditions indicated.




EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1


Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specifiedB.in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, andforeign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


PREPARATION3.2

Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion ofA.resilient products.

Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patchingB.compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where theyC.are to be installed.

Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be1.installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediatelyD.before installation.

RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION3.3

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.A.

Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces,B.and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and withC.tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base inD.continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

Do not stretch resilient base during installation.E.

On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge ofF.resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.G.




Job-Formed Corners:H.

Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form1.without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.2.


Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilientA.products.

Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient productB.installation:

Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.1.Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.2.

Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage fromC.construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder ofconstruction period.

Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.D.





SECTION 09681 - CARPET TILE

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section includes modular, tufted carpet tile.A.


Section 01732 "Selective Demolition" for removing existing floor coverings.1.Section 09651 "Resilient Floor Tile" Section 09653 "Resilient Wall Base and2.Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile.



Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and1.fade resistance.Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate.2.

Shop Drawings: Show the following:B.

Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations1.where cutouts are required in carpet tiles.Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot.2.Type of subfloor.3.Type of installation.4.Pattern of installation.5.Pattern type, location, and direction.6.Pile direction.7.Type, color, and location of insets and borders.8.Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.9.Transition details to other flooring materials.10.

Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required.C.Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, anddesignation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.1.


CARPET TILESection 09681

Page 1 of 4


Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include theA.following:

Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal1.products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenanceschedule.Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to2.carpet tile.


Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the InternationalA.Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level.


Comply with CRI 104.A.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.7

Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.A.

Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosedB.and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature andhumidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of theconstruction period.

Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficientlyC.dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tilemanufacturer.

Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpetD.tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items.

WARRANTY1.8

Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace componentsA.of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warrantyperiod.

Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual1.traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling,2.snags, runs, dimensional stability, loss of tuft bind strength, loss of face fiber, anddelamination.Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.3.



Page 2 of 4

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

CARPET TILE (CPT-1)2.1


Shaw Contract Group1.

Style:Transparent Tile 59563.a.Collection: Clearview.b.Color: 62486 Blue Moon.c.Installation: Quarter Turn.d.

INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES2.2

Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-basedA.formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suitB.products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirementsfor installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasableinstallation.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance withA.requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, andother conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color,pattern, and potential defects.

Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and theB.following:

Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and1.other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion anddryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended bycarpet tile manufacturer.Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.2.


PREPARATION3.2

General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," andA.with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substratesindicated to receive carpet tile installation.



Page 3 of 4

Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's writtenB.instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or levelcracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's writteninstructions.

Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpetC.tile.

INSTALLATION3.3

General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tileA.manufacturer's written installation instructions.

Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer .B.

Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.C.

Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-inD.furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind orseal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,E.removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for futureF.cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent,nonstaining marking device.

Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.G.


Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:A.

Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using1.cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.2.Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.3.

Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting IndoorB.Installations."

Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement ofC.equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protectionmethods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.




Page 4 of 4

SECTION 09912 - INTERIOR PAINTING

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on theA.following interior substrates:

Steel.1.Gypsum board.2.

DEFINITIONS1.3

Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees,A.according to ASTM D 523.

Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,B.according to ASTM D 523.

Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, accordingC.to ASTM D 523.

Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,D.according to ASTM D 523.

Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.E.

Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.F.

Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.G.


Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements andA.application instructions.

Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss ofB.topcoat.

Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.1.Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.2.Label each coat of each Sample.3.Label each Sample for location and application area.4.


INTERIOR PAINTINGSection 09912

Page 1 of 5

MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS1.5

Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed andA.that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labelsdescribing contents.

Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.1.


Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas withA.ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.1.Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.2.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.7

Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient airA.temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures lessB.than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURERS2.1


Benjamin Moore & Co.1.ICI Paints.2.M.A.B. Paints.3.Pratt & Lambert.4.Sherwin-Williams Company (The).5.

PAINT, GENERAL2.2

Material Compatibility:A.

Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one1.another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application asdemonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by2.manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

Colors: Match existing paint finish.B.



Page 2 of 5

PRIMERS/SEALERS2.3

Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI #50.A.

WATER-BASED PAINTS2.4

Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #139.A.

Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #141.B.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL2.5

Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:A.

Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint1.materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present whensamples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site,samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, andcertified by testing agency.Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.2.Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show3.materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shallremove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, andrepaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required toremove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting withcomplying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance withA.requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performanceof the Work.

Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moistureB.meter as follows:

Gypsum Board: 12 percent.1.

Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.C.

Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existingD.finishes and primers.

Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have beenE.corrected.

Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.1.



Page 3 of 5

PREPARATION3.2

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"A.applicable to substrates indicated.

Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removableB.and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size orweight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation andpainting.

After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to1.reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil,C.grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or1.apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abradedD.areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shoppriming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

APPLICATION3.3

Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations inA."MPI Manual."

Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.1.Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed2.surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixedequipment or furniture with prime coat only.Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and3.similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,4.identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory5.primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coatsB.of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, butprovide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until curedC.film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brushD.marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharplines and color breaks.



Page 4 of 5


At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discardedA.materials from Project site.

After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints byB.washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finishedsurfaces.

Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage toC.work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved byArchitect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged orD.defaced painted surfaces.

INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE3.5

Steel Substrates:A.

High-Performance Architectural Latex System:1.

Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate isa.specified.Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural,b.matching topcoat.Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-glossc.(Gloss Level 5), MPI #141.

Gypsum Board Substrates:B.

High-Performance Architectural Latex System:1.

Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50.a.Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural,b.matching topcoat.Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 3),c.MPI #139.




Page 5 of 5

SECTION 10101 - VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Markerboards.1.

DEFINITIONS1.3

Visual Display Board Assembly: Visual display surface that is factory fabricated intoA.composite panel form, either with or without a perimeter frame; includes chalkboards,markerboards, and tackboards.

Visual Display Surface: Surfaces that are used to convey information visually, includingB.surfaces of chalkboards, markerboards, tackboards, and surfacing materials that are notfabricated into composite panel form but are applied directly to walls.


Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, materialA.descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for visualdisplay surfaces.

Shop Drawings: For visual display surfaces. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,B.and attachments to other work.

Show locations of panel joints.1.Include sections of typical trim members.2.


Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained andA.approved for installation of motor-operated, sliding visual display units required for thisProject.

Source Limitations: Obtain visual display surfaces from single source from singleB.manufacturer.


VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACESSection 10101

Page 1 of 6

Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products accordingC.to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markingsof applicable testing agency.

Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.1.Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.2.


Deliver factory-built visual display surfaces, including factory-applied trim whereA.indicated, completely assembled in one piece without joints, where possible. Ifdimensions exceed maximum manufactured panel size, provide two or more pieces ofequal length as acceptable to Architect. When overall dimensions require delivery inseparate units, prefit components at the factory, disassemble for delivery, and make finaljoints at the site.

Store visual display surfaces vertically with packing materials between each unit.B.


Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display surfaces until spacesA.are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work aboveceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambienttemperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of theconstruction period.

Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with visualB.display surfaces by field measurements before fabrication.

Allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication1.might delay the Work.

WARRANTY1.8

Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer's standard form inA.which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail inmaterials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:1.

Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities.a.Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking.b.

Warranty Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion.2.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MATERIALS, GENERAL2.1



Page 2 of 6

Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: Manufacturer's standard steel sheet with porcelain-A.enamel coating fused to steel; uncoated thickness indicated.


Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.a.PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company.b.

Matte Finish: Low reflective; chalk wipes clean with dry cloth or standard eraser.2.

Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, tempered.B.

Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-1C.

Fiberboard: ASTM C 208.D.

Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063.E.

MARKERBOARD ASSEMBLIES2.2

Porcelain-Enamel Markerboards: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminatedA.markerboard assembly of three-ply construction consisting of backing sheet, corematerial, and porcelain-enamel face sheet with low-gloss finish.


AARCO Products, Inc.a.ADP Lemco, Inc.b.Aywon.c.Bangor Cork Company, Inc.d.Best-Rite Manufacturing.e.Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.f.Egan Visual Inc.g.Ghent Manufacturing, Inc.h.Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group.i.Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc.j.PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company.k.Tri-Best Visual Display Products.l.

Manufacturer's Standard Core: Minimum 1/4 inch thick, with manufacturer's2.standard moisture-barrier backing.Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, moisture-resistant thermoplastic3.type.

MARKERBOARD ACCESSORIES2.3

Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch- thick, extrudedA.aluminum; standard size and shape.

Factory-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard.1.



Page 3 of 6

Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard, continuous.B.

Solid Type: Extruded aluminum with ribbed section and smoothly curved1.exposed ends.

Map Rail: Provide the following accessories:C.

Display Rail: Continuous and integral with map rail; fabricated from cork1.approximately 1 to 2 inches wide.End Stops: Located at each end of map rail.2.Paper Holder: Extruded aluminum; designed to hold paper by clamping action.3.

FABRICATION2.4

Porcelain-Enamel Visual Display Assemblies: Laminate porcelain-enamel face sheetA.and backing sheet to core material under heat and pressure with manufacturer'sstandard flexible, waterproof adhesive.

Visual Display Boards: Factory assemble visual display boards unless otherwiseB.indicated.

Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to1.visual display boards at manufacturer's factory before shipment.

Factory-Assembled Visual Display Units: Coordinate factory-assembled units with trimC.and accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit.

Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length.1.Fabricate with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, asacceptable to Architect.Provide manufacturer's standard vertical-joint spline system between abutting2.sections of markerboards.Provide manufacturer's standard mullion trim at joints between markerboards of3.combination units.Where size of visual display boards or other conditions require support in4.addition to normal trim, provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated oras selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard structural supportaccessories to suit conditions indicated.

Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricate units straight and of single lengths, keeping jointsD.to a minimum. Miter corners to a neat, hairline closure.

Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to1.visual display units at manufacturer's factory before shipment.

GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS2.5

Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" forA.recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,B.temporary protective covering before shipping.



Page 4 of 6

Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.C.Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within therange of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

ALUMINUM FINISHES2.6

Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.A.

VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACE SCHEDULE2.7

Visual Display Board: Factory assembled.A.

Markerboard: Porcelain-enamel markerboard assembly.1.

Color: White.a.

Corners: Square.2.Width: 12 feet.3.Height: 4 feet.4.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance withA.requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditionsaffecting performance of the Work.

Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual displayB.surfaces.


PREPARATION3.2

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.A.

Clean substrates of substances that could impair the performance of and affect theB.smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards, including dirt, mold, and mildew.

Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsoundC.coatings, cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bondbetween visual display surfaces and wall surfaces.


General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated onA.Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight,



Page 5 of 6

level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets,anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.

Mounting Height for Grades 7 and Higher: 36 inches above finished floor to top1.of chalktray.

INSTALLATION OF FACTORY-FABRICATED VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS AND ASSEMBLIES3.4

Visual Display Boards: Attach concealed clips, hangers, and grounds to wall surfacesA.and to visual display boards with fasteners at not more than 16 inches o.c. Secure bothtop and bottom of boards to walls.


Clean visual display surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. AttachA.one cleaning label to visual display surface in each room.

Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.B.

Cover and protect visual display surfaces after installation and cleaning.C.




Page 6 of 6

SECTION 10651 - OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Manually operated, acoustical panel partitions.1.

DEFINITIONS1.3

NIC: Noise Isolation Class.A.

NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.B.

STC: Sound Transmission Class.C.



Shop Drawings: For operable panel partitions.C.

Include plans, elevations, sections, details, numbered panel installation1.sequence, and attachments to other work.Indicate stacking and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation2.requirements for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel.

Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, orD.facing.

Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.1.

Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing,E.prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

Textile Facing Material: Full width by not less than 36-inch- long section of fabric1.from dye lot to be used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Showcomplete pattern repeat.Panel Facing Material: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, not less than 3 inches2.square.


OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONSSection 10651

Page 1 of 7


Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the followingA.items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the itemsinvolved:

Partition track, track supports and bracing, switches, turning space, and storage1.layout.Suspended ceiling components.2.Structural members to which suspension systems are attached.3.Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.4.Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:5.

Lighting fixtures.a.HVAC ductwork, outlets, and inlets.b.Speakers.c.Sprinklers.d.Smoke detectors.e.Access panels.f.

Plenum acoustical barriers.6.

Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work, includingB.support-beam, mounting-hole template.

Product Certificates: For each type of operable panel partition.D.

Include approval letter signed by manufacturer acknowledging Owner-furnished1.panel facing material complies with requirements.

Product Test Reports: For each operable panel partition, for tests performed by aE.qualified testing agency.

Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.G.


Operation and Maintenance Data: For operable panel partitions to include inA.maintenance manuals.

In addition to items specified in Section 01783 "Project Record Documents,"1.include the following:

Panel finish facings and finishes for exposed trim and accessories.a.Include precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could bedetrimental to finishes and performance.Seals, hardware, track, track switches, carriers, and other operatingb.components.



Page 2 of 7

MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS1.7

Furnish extra materials, from the same production run, that match products installed andA.that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labelsdescribing contents.

Panel Finish-Facing Material: Furnish full width in quantity to cover both sides of1.two panels when installed.


Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custodyA.by an FSC-accredited certification body.

Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trainedB.and approved by manufacturer.


Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly markA.packages and panels with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not usepermanent markings on panels.

WARRANTY1.10

Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operableA.panel partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:1.

Faulty operation of operable panel partitions.a.Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyondb.normal use.

Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.2.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -


Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in SectionA.01400 "Quality Requirements," to design seismic bracing of tracks to structure above.

Seismic Performance: Operable panel partitions shall withstand the effects ofB.earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.



Page 3 of 7

The term "withstand" means "the partition panels will remain in place without1.separation of any parts from the system when subjected to the seismic forcesspecified."

Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified testingC.agency for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated:

Sound-Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested1.for laboratory sound-transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90,determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide panels with finishes complying with one ofD.the following as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing andinspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by1.a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings ofapplicable testing agency.

Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.a.Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.b.

Fire Growth Contribution: Complying with acceptance criteria of local code and2.authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 286.

OPERABLE ACOUSTICAL PANELS2.2

Operable Acoustical Panels: Partition system, including panels, seals, finish facing,A.suspension system, operators, and accessories.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by1.one of the following:Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide2.Modernfold, Inc.; Acousti-Seal 932FS, or comparable product by one of thefollowing:

Advanced Equipment Corporation.a.FolDoor; Holcomb & Hoke Mfg. Co., Inc.b.Hufcor, Inc.c.KWIK-WALL Company.d.Moderco Inc.e.Modernfold, Inc.; a DORMA Group company.f.Panelfold Inc.g.

Panel Operation: Manually operated, paired panels.B.

Dimensions: Fabricate operable acoustical panel partitions to form an assembledC.system of dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements.

Panel Width: Equal widths.1.

STC: Not less than 50.D.



Page 4 of 7

Panel Weight: 8 lb/sq. ft. maximum.E.

Panel Thickness: Not less than 3 inches.F.

Panel Materials:G.

Steel Frame: Steel sheet, manufacturer's standard nominal minimum thickness1.for uncoated steel.Steel Face/Liner Sheets: Tension-leveled steel sheet, manufacturer's standard 2.minimum nominal thickness for uncoated steel.Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher3.for type of use, corrosion resistance, and finish indicated; ASTM B 221 forextrusions; manufacturer's standard strengths and thicknesses for type of use.

Frame Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard steel or aluminum.a.

Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.4.Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.5.Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, made with binder containing no urea6.formaldehyde.Plywood: DOC PS 1; made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde.7.

Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.H.

Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition andI.accessories; with decorative, protective finish.

SEALS2.3

General: Provide seals that produce operable panel partitions complying withA.performance requirements and the following:

Manufacturer's standard seals unless otherwise indicated.1.Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage.2.Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent3.panels and between operable panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces,when operable panel partition is extended and closed.

Vertical Seals: Deep-nesting, interlocking astragals mounted on each edge of panel,B.with continuous PVC acoustical seal.

Horizontal Top Seals: Continuous-contact, extruded-PVC seal exerting uniform constantC.pressure on track or PVC-faced, mechanical, retractable, constant-force-contact sealexerting uniform constant pressure on track when extended.

Horizontal Bottom Seals: Manufacturer's standard continuous-contact seal exertingD.uniform constant pressure on floor.

PANEL FINISH FACINGS2.4

General: Provide finish facings for panels that comply with indicated fire-test-responseA.characteristics and that are factory applied to operable panel partitions with appropriate



Page 5 of 7

backing, using mildew-resistant nonstaining adhesive as recommended by facingmanufacturer's written instructions.

Apply one-piece, seamless facings free of air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and1.other defects, with edges tightly butted, and with invisible seams complying withShop Drawings for location, and with no gaps or overlaps. Horizontal seams arenot permitted. Tightly secure and conceal raw and selvage edges of facing forfinished appearance.Where facings with directional or repeating patterns or directional weave are2.indicated, mark facing top and attach facing in same direction.Match facing pattern 72 inches above finished floor.3.

Vinyl-Coated Fabric Wall Covering: Manufacturer's standard, mildew-resistant,B.washable, vinyl-coated fabric wall covering; complying with CFFA-W-101-D for typeindicated; Class A.

Antimicrobial Treatment: Additives capable of inhibiting growth of bacteria, fungi,1.and yeasts.Color/Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.2.

Cap-Trimmed Edges: Protective perimeter-edge trim with tight hairline joints concealingC.edges of panel and finish facing, finished as follows:

Steel, Painted: Finished with manufacturer's color as selected by Architect from1.manufacturer's full range.

Trimless Edges: Fabricate exposed panel edges so finish facing wraps uninterruptedD.around panel, covering edge and resulting in an installed partition with facing visible onvertical panel edges, without trim, for minimal sightlines at panel-to-panel joints.

ACCESSORIES2.5

Work Surfaces: Quantities, placement, and size indicated.A.

Surface: Porcelain steel marker/projection surface.1.Surface Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.2.Size: Full width and height of panel.3.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine flooring, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for complianceA.with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performanceof operable panel partitions.




Page 6 of 7

INSTALLATION3.2

General: Comply with ASTM E 557 except as otherwise required by operable panelA.partition manufacturer's written installation instructions.

Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations,B.including painting, have been completed in area of partition installation.

Install panels from marked packages in numbered sequence indicated on ShopC.Drawings.

Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable.D.

Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at buttedE.ends is not acceptable.

Light-Leakage Test: Illuminate one side of partition installation and observe vertical jointsF.and top and bottom seals for voids. Adjust partitions for alignment and full closure ofvertical joints and full closure along top and bottom seals.

ADJUSTING3.3

Adjust operable panel partitions, hardware, and other moving parts to function smoothly,A.and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

Verify that safety devices are properly functioning.B.

DEMONSTRATION3.4

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenanceA.personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions.




Page 7 of 7

SECTION 12494 - ROLLER SHADES

GENERALPART 1 -



SUMMARY1.2

Section Includes:A.

Manually operated roller shades with single rollers.1.


Section 06105 "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for1.mounting roller shades and accessories.



Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of1.individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructionsfor roller shades.

Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, includingB.shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.


Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals.A.


Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products, or an Installer approved by Fabricator.A.


Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, andA.location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.


ROLLER SHADESSection 12494

Page 1 of 5

FIELD CONDITIONS1.7

Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish workA.in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidityconditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for itsintended use.

Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verifyB.dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicatemeasurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operableglazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions thatvary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoiddelaying the Work.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURERS2.1


Draper Inc.1.Hunter Douglas Contract.2.Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.3.MechoShade Systems, Inc.4.Nysan Solar Control Inc.; Hunter Douglas Company.5.

Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer.B.

MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS2.2

Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutchA.that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted andlubricated.

Bead Chains: Manufacturer's standard.1.

Loop Length: Full length of roller shade .a.Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.b.Chain-Retainer Type: Chain tensioner, jamb mounted.c.

Spring Lift-Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller-2.shade weight and lifting heavy roller shades.

Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 10 lb or for shades asa.recommended by manufacturer, whichever criteria are more stringent.

Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wallB.thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths ofshadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end



Page 2 of 5

assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands forservice.

Roller Drive-End Location: Left side of inside face of shade.1.Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back of roller.2.Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.3.

Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with rollerC.assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location andconditions indicated.

Shadebands:D.

Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric.1.Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.2.

Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material.a.

Installation Accessories:E.

Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and1.operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners.

Shape: L-shaped.a.Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller andb.shadeband when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches.

Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps.2.Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full3.range.

SHADEBAND MATERIALS2.3

Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by aA.qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testingagency.

Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant.B.

Source: Roller-shade manufacturer.1.Type: [PVC-coated fiberglass] [PVC-coated polyester] [Woven PVC-coated2.fiberglass and PVC-coated polyester] [Woven polyester and PVC-coatedpolyester] [Acrylic-coated fiberglass] [PVC-coated fiberglass with silverbacking] <Insert description>.Weave: [Mesh] [Basketweave] <Insert description>.3.Thickness: <Insert thickness>.4.Weight: <Insert oz./sq. yd.>.5.Roll Width: [36 inches] [48 inches] [60 inches] [72 inches] [84 inches] <Insert6.dimension>.Openness Factor: 3 percent.7.Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.8.



Page 3 of 5

ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION2.4

Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1,A.including requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; andwarning labels.

Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows,B.measured at 74 deg F:

Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations1.between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or otherdefined vertical separations between openings.

Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extentC.possible except as follows:

Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater1.than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadebandlength to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range ofmovement without distortion of the material.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance withA.requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditionsaffecting performance of the Work.


ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION3.2

Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according toA.manufacturer's written instructions.

ADJUSTING3.3

Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free fromA.binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.


Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's writtenA.instructions.



Page 4 of 5

Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturerB.and Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time ofSubstantial Completion.

Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved byC.Architect, before time of Substantial Completion.




Page 5 of 5

MORTON COLLEGE BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 9

SECTION 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Mechanical Contractor Provides:

1. Furnish and install all items listed in the Plumbing Material List.

2. Extend existing sanitary, vent, and domestic water lines to new plumbing fixture.

3. Furnish and install electrical baseboard radiation and accessories.

4. Extend existing supply air ductwork systems including all fittings, insulation, and outlets.

5. Extend existing return air ductwork systems including all fittings, insulation, and inlets.

6. Modify existing temperature control systems.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Requirements applicable to all Division 15 Sections. Also refer to Division 1 - General Requirements.

B. All materials and installation methods shall conform to the applicable stan dards, guidelines and codes referenced in the specification section.

C. This specification and the associated drawings govern the furnishing, installing, testing and placing into satisfactory operation the mechanical systems.

D. Each contractor shall provi de all ne w materials indicated on the drawin gs and/or in these specifications, and al items required to make this portion of the mechanical work a finished and working system.

1.3 WORK SEQUENCE

A. All work that will produce ex cessive noise or interference with normal building operations, as determined by the Owner, shall be scheduled with the Owner. It may be n ecessary to schedule such work during unoccupied hours. The Owner reserves the right to determine when restricted construction hours will be required.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Contractor’s Responsibility Prior to Submitting Pricing Data:

1. The Contractor is re sponsible for con structing complete and operating systems. The Contractor acknowledges and u nderstands that the Contract Documents are a two-dimensional representation of a three-dimensional object, subject to human interpretation. This represen tation may include imperfect dat a, interpreted codes, utility guidelines, three-dimensional conflicts, and required field coordination items. Such deficiencies can be corrected when identified prior to ord ering material a nd starting installation. The Contractor agrees to carefully study and compare the individual Contract Documents and report at once in writing to the Design Team any d eficiencies the


Contractor may discover. The Contractor further agrees to require each subcontractor to likewise study the documents and report at once any deficiencies discovered.

2. The Contractor shall resolve all reported deficiencies with the Architect/Engineer prior to awarding any subcontracts, ordering material, or starting any work with the Contractor’s own employees. Any work performed prior to receipt of in structions from the Design Team will be done at the Contractor’s risk.

B. Qualifications:

1. Only products of reputable manufacturers are acceptable.

2. All Contractors and subcontractors shall employ only workers skilled in their trades.

C. Compliance with Codes, Laws, Ordinances:

1. Conform to all requirements of the City of Cicero, IL Codes, Laws, Ordinances and other regulations having jurisdiction.

2. Conform to all State Codes.

3. If there is a discrepancy between the codes and regulations and these specifications, the Engineer shall determine the method or equipment used.

4. If the Contractor notes, at the time of bi dding, any parts of the drawings or specifications that do not comply with the codes or regulations, he shall inform the Architect/Engineer in writing, requesting a clarification. If there is insufficient time for this procedure, he shall submit with his proposal a separate price to make the system comply with the codes and regulations.

5. All changes to the sy stem made afte r letting of the contract, to comply with codes or requirements of Inspectors, shall be made by the Contractor without cost to the Owner.

6. If there is a discrepancy between manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications, the manufacturer's recommendations shall govern.

D. Permits, Fees, Taxes, Inspections:

1. Procure all applicable permits and licenses.

2. Abide by all laws, re gulations, ordinances, and other rule s of the State or Political Subdivision where the work is do ne, or as required by any duly constituted public authority.

3. Pay all charges for permits or licenses.

4. Pay all fees and taxes imposed by the State, Municipal and/or other regulatory bodies.

5. Pay all charges arising out of required inspections by an authorized body.

6. Pay all cha rges arising out of required contract document reviews a ssociated with the project and as initiated by the Owner or authorized agency/consultant.

7. Where applicable, all fixtu res, equipment and materials sh all be approved or listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.


E. Examination of Drawings:

1. The drawings for the mechanical work are completely diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicat e the gene ral arrangements and lo cations of equipment, outlets, etc., and the approximate sizes of equipment.

2. Contractor shall determine the exact locations of equipment and rough-ins, and the exact routing of pipes and ducts to best fit the layout of the job.

3. Scaling of the drawings is not sufficient or accurate for determining these locations.

4. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated arrangements and locations, such changes shall b e made by t he Contractor at n o additional cost to the Owner.

5. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items, such as fittings, boxes, valves, unions, etc., may not be shown, but where required by other sections of the specifications or required for proper installation of the work, such items shall be furnished and installed.

6. If an item is either on the drawings or in the specifications, it sh all be included in this contract.

7. Determination of qu antities of m aterial and equipment required shall be made by the Contractor from the do cuments. Wher e discrepancies arise between drawings, schedules and/or specifications, the greater number shall govern.

8. Where used in mechanical documents, the word "furnish" shall mean supply for use, the word "install" shall mean connect complete and ready for operation, and the word "provide" shall mean to supply for use and connect complete and ready for operation.

a. Any item listed as furnished shall also be installed, unless otherwise noted.

b. Any item listed as installed shall also be furnished, unless otherwise noted.

F. Field Measurements:

1. Verify all pertinent dimensions at the job site before ordering any materials or fabricating any supports, pipes or ducts.

G. Electronic Media/Files:

1. Construction drawings for this project have been prepared utilizing AutoCAD MEP.

2. Contractors and Sub contractors may request electronic media files of the cont ract drawings and/or copies of the specifications. Specifications will be provid ed in PDF format.

3. Upon request for ele ctronic media, the Contractor shall complete and return a signed “Electronic File Transmittal” form provided by KJWW.

4. If the information requested includes floor plans prepared by others, the Contractor will be responsible for obtaining approval from the appropriate Design Professional for use of that part of the document.

5. The electronic contract documents can be used for preparation of shop drawings and as-built drawings only. The information may not be used in whole or in part for any other project.


6. The drawings prepared by KJWW fo r bidding purposes may not be used directly for ductwork layout drawings or coordination drawings.

7. The use of t hese CAD documents by the C ontractor does not relieve them from th eir responsibility for coordination of work with other trades and verification of space available for the installation.

8. The information is provide d to expedite t he project and a ssist the Contracto r with no guarantee by KJWW as t o the accura cy or co rrectness of the informatio n provided. KJWW accepts no responsibility or liability for the Contractor’s use of these documents.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall be required for the following items, and for additional items where required elsewhere in the specifications or on the drawings.

1. Submittals list:

Referenced Specification

Section Submittal Item

Refer to drawings Plumbing Material List Items 15835 Terminal Heat Transfer Equipment

B. In addition to the provisions of Division 1, the following provisions are required:

1. Submittals shall include all fabricati on, erection, layout, a nd setting drawings; manufacturers' standard drawings; schedules; descriptive literature, cat alogs and brochures; performance and test d ata; wiring and control diagrams; and all other drawings and descriptive data of materials of construction as may be required to show that the m aterials, equipment or systems and the location thereof conform to th e requirements of the contract documents.

2. The Contractor shall submit one electronic copy of each shop drawing for review by the Architect/Engineer BEFORE releasing any equipment for manufacture or shipment.

3. Shop drawings which are larger than 11"x 17" or are plan size layout or erection drawings such as ductwork layout or sprinkler system drawings shall be submitted on reproducible media. Submit one reproducible and one print of each drawing or plan. All Contracto r approval stamps shall be made on the reproducible.

4. The Contractor shall thoroughly review and approve all shop drawings before submitting them to the Architect/Engineer. CONTRACTOR’S APPROVAL STAMP IS REQUIRED ON ALL SUBMITTALS. APPROVAL WILL I NDICATE THE CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW of all material and a COM PLETE UNDERSTANDING OF EXACTLY WHAT I S TO BE FURNISHED. Contractor shall clearly mark all deviations from the contract documents on all submittals. IF DEVIATIONS ARE NOT MARKED BY THE CONTRACTOR, THEN THE ITEM SHALL BE REQUIRE D TO M EET ALL DRA WING AND SPECI FICATION REQUIREMENTS.

5. The Contractor shall clearly mark each item with the same nomenclature applied on the drawings or in the specifications.

6. The Contractor shall clearly indicate the size, finish, material, etc.


7. Assemble and submit by specification section numbers for all submittals. All sets shall be identical and contain an index of the ite ms enclosed with a general topic description on the cover.

8. Each set shall be bound in a manufacturer's folder or inside of a manila file folder.

9. Where more than one model is shown on a manuf acturer's sheet, the Contractor shall clearly indicate exactly which item and which data is relevant to the work.

10. Failure to comply with the above shall be reason to resubmit all shop drawing submittals.

11. The Engineer's responsibility shall be to re view one set of sho p drawing submittals for each product. If the first submittal is incomplete or does not comply with the drawings and/or specifications, the Contractor shall be responsible to bear the cost for the Engineer to recheck and handle the additional shop drawing submittals.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING & MAINTENANCE

A. Exercise care in transporting and handling to avoid damage to materials. Store materials on the site to prevent damage. Keep materials clean, dry and free from harmful conditions. Immediately remove any materials that become wet or th at are suspected of becoming contaminated with mold or other organisms.

B. Contractor is respon sible for moving e quipment into the buildin g and/or site. Contra ctor shall review site prior to bid for path loca tions and any required b uilding modifications to a llow movement of equipment. Contractor shall coordinate his/her work with other trades.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Provide one-year warranty, unless oth erwise noted, to the Owner for all fixtures, equipment, materials, and workmanship.

B. The warranty period for all work in this Division of the specifications shall commence on the date of final acce ptance, unless a whole or partial system or any separate piece of equipm ent or component is put into use for the benefit of any party other than the installing contractor with prior written authorization. In this in stance, the warranty period shall commence on the date when such whole system, partial system or separate piece of e quipment or compo nent is placed in operation and accepted in writing by the Owner.

C. Warranty requirements shall extend to correction, without cost to the Owner, of all Work found to be defective or nonconforming to the contract documents. The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting all damage resulting from defects or nonconformance with contract documents.

1.8 INSURANCE

A. Contractor shall maintain insurance coverage as set forth in Division 0 of these specifications.

1.9 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTION

A. Where several manufacturers’ names are given, the manufacturer for which a catalog num ber is given is the basis for job design and establishes the quality required.

B. Equivalent equipment manufactured by the other named manufacturers may be used. Contractor shall ensure that all items submitted by these other manufacturers meet all re quirements of the drawings and specifications, and fits in the allocated space.


C. Any material, article or equipment of other unnamed manufacturers which will adequately perform the services and duties imposed by t he design and is of a qu ality equal to or bette r than the material, article or equipment identified by t he drawings and specifications may be u sed if approval is secured in writing from the Architect/Engineer not later than ten da ys prior to the bid opening.

D. This Contractor assumes all co sts incurred as a result of using the offered m aterial, article or equipment, on his part or on the part of other Contractors whose work is affected.

E. This Contractor may li st voluntary add or deduct prices for alternate materials on the bid form. These items will not be used in determining the low bidder.

F. All material substitutions requested later than ten (10) days prior to bid opening must be listed as voluntary changes on the bid form.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT APPLICABLE

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 JOBSITE SAFETY

A. Neither the professional activities of the Engineer, nor the presence of the Engineer or his or her employee and subconsultants at a construction site, shall relieve the Contractor and other entity of their obligations, duties and responsibilities including, but not limited to, construction means, methods, sequence, techniques or procedures necessary for performing, superintending or coordinating all portions of the work of construction in accordance with the contract documents and any health or safety precautions required by any regulatory agencies. The Engineer and his or her personnel have no authority to exerci se any control over any con struction contractor or other entity or their employees in connection with their work or any health or safety precautions. The Contractor is solely responsible for jo bsite safety. The Engineer and the En gineer’s consultants shall be in demnified and shall b e made additional insureds under the Contractor’s general liability insurance policy.

3.2 ENGINEER OBSERVATION OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall provide seven (7) calendar days notice to the Engineer prior to:

1. Covering chases.

2. Installing hard or suspended ceilings and soffits.

B. The Engineer will have the oppo rtunity to revi ew the installatio n and provid e a written report noting deficiencies requiring correction. The Contractor’s schedule shall account for these reviews and show them as line items in the approved schedule.

C. Above-Ceiling Final Observation

1. All work above the ceilings must be complete prior to the Engineer’s review. This includes, but is not limited to:

a. Main, branch and flexible ducts are installed.

b. Diffusers, registers and grilles are installed and connected to ductwork.


2. In order to prevent the A bove-Ceiling Final Observation from occurring too early, the Contractor shall review the status of the work and certify, in writing, that the work is ready for the Above-Ceiling Final Observation.

3. It is understood that if the Engineer finds the ceilings have been installed prior to thi s review and prior to 7 days elapsing, the Engineer may not recommend further payments to the contractor until such time as full access has been provided.

3.3 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.

B. Final Jobsite Observation:

1. In order to prevent the Final Jobsite Observation from occurring too early, the Contractor is required to review the completion status of the project and certify that the job is ready for the final jobsite observation.

2. Attached to the end of this section is a typical list of items that represent the degree of job completeness expected prior to requesting a review.

3. Upon Contractor certification that the project is complete and ready for a final punch, the Contractor shall sign the attached certification and return it to the Architect/Engineer so that the final observation can be scheduled.

4. It is understood that if t he Engineer finds the job not ready for the final observation and that additional trips and observations are required to bring the project to completion, the costs incurred by the Engineers additional time and expenses will be deducted from the Contractor’s contract retainage prior to final payment at the completion of the job.

C. Before final payment is authorized, This Contractor must submit the following:

1. Operation and maintenance manuals with copies of approved shop drawings.

2. Record documents including reproducible drawings and specifications.

3. Inspection report by the State Fire Marshal of the fire protection system.

3.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Submit three properly indexed and bound copies, in ‘D’ Ring style notebooks, of the Operations and Maintenance Instructions to t he Architect/Engineer. Make all corre ctions or additions required.

B. Manuals shall be completed and in the Own er's possession prior to Owner's acceptance and at least 10 days prior to instruction of operating personnel.

C. Operation and maintenance data shall consist of written instructions for the care, maintenance, and operation of all equipment and systems. Include all instruction books, cards, and manuals furnished with the equipment.

3.5 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING

A. The mechanical systems shall be complete and operating. System start-up, testing, balancing, and satisfactory system performance is the re sponsibility of the Co ntractor. This in cludes calibration and adjustments of all controls, noise level adjustments and final comfort adjustments as required.


B. All operating conditions and control sequences shall be tested during the start-up period. Test all interlocks, safety shutdowns, controls, and alarms.

3.6 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. The following paragraph supplements Division 1 requirements:

Contractor shall maintain at the job site a separate and complete set of mechanical drawings and specifications on which he shall clearly and p ermanently mark i n complete detail all changes made to the mechanical systems.

B. Mark drawings to indicate revisions to piping and ductwork, size and location, both exterior and interior; including locations of coils, d ampers, other control devices, filters, and other units requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations, dimensioned from column lines; actual inverts an d locations of u nderground piping; concealed equipment, dimensioned from column lines; mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (e.g., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.); Change Orders; concealed control system devices.

C. Mark specifications to show approved substitutions; Change Orders, and actual equipment and materials used.

D. Record changes daily and keep the marked drawings available for the Archite ct/Engineer's examination at any normal work time.

E. Upon completing the job, and befo re final payment is made, give the marked-up drawings to the Architect/Engineer.

3.7 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Thoroughly clean all equipment and systems prior to the Owner's final acceptance of the project. Clean all foreign paint, g rease, oil, dirt, labels, sti ckers, and o ther foreign material from all equipment.

B. Remove all rubbish, debris, etc., accumulated during construction from the premises.

END OF SECTION


READINESS CERTIFICATION PRIOR TO FINAL JOBSITE OBSERVATION

In order to prevent the final job observation from occurring too early, we require that the Contractor review the completion status of the project and, by copy of this document, certify that the job is indeed ready for the final job observation. The following is a typical list of items that represent the degree of job completeness expected prior to your requesting a final job observation.

1. All miscellaneous mechanical systems (unit heaters, fan coil units, cabinet heaters, etc.) operating. 2. All plumbing fixtures installed and caulked.

Accepted by:

Prime Contractor _______________________________________________

By ___________________________________ Date ___________________

Upon Contractor certification that the p roject is complete and ready for a final job observation, we require the Contractor to sign this agreement and return it to the Engineer so that the final observation can be scheduled.

It is understood that if the Enginee r finds the job not ready for the final observation and that additional trips and observations are required to bring the project to completion, the costs incurred by the Engineers for additional time and ex penses will be deducted from the Contra ctor's contract retainage prior to final payme nt at the completion of the job.

* * * * *

MORTON COLLEGE MECHANICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 15060 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Mechanical demolition. B. Cutting and Patching.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials and equipment shall be as specified in individual Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. THE DRAWINGS ARE INTENDED TO INDICATE THE GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK AND DO NOT SHOW EVERY PIPE, DUCT, OR PIECE OF EQUIPMENT THAT MUST BE REMOV ED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE AND VERI FY CONDITIONS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING A BID.

B. Where walls, ceilings, etc., are shown as being removed on general drawings, the Contractor shall remove all mechanical equipment, devices, fi xtures, piping, ducts, systems, etc., from the removed area.

C. Where ceilings, walls, pa rtitions, etc., are temporarily removed and replaced by others, This Contractor shall remove, store, and replace equipment, devices, fixtures, pipes, ducts, systems, etc.

D. Verify that abandoned utilities serve only abandoned equipment or facilities. Extend se rvices to facilities or equipment that shall remain in operation following demolition.

E. Coordinate work with all other Contractors and the Owner. Schedule removal of equipment to avoid conflicts.

F. This Contractor shall verify all existing equipment sizes and capa cities where equipment is scheduled to be replaced or modified, prior to ordering new equipment.

G. Bid submittal shall mean the Contractor has visited the project site and verified existing conditions and scope of work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Disconnect mechanical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal.

B. Provide temporary connections to maintain ex isting systems in service during construction. When work must be p erformed on op erating equipment, use p ersonnel experienced in such operations.


3.3 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING MECHANICAL WORK

A. Demolish and extend existing mechanical work under provisions of Division 2 and this Section.

B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

C. Remove abandoned ducts to source of supply and/or main lines.

D. Remove exposed abandoned ducts, including abandoned ducts above accessible ceilings. Cut ducts flush with walls and floors, ca p duct that remains, and p atch surfaces. Repair building construction to match o riginal. Remove all clamps, hangers, supports, etc. associated with duct removal.

E. Disconnect and remove mechanical devices and equipment serving equi pment that ha s been removed.

F. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.

G. Maintain access to ex isting mechanical installations which remain. Modify installation or provide access panels as appropriate.

H. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations, or as specified.

I. Remove unused sections of supply and return air ductwork back to mains. Patch opening with sheet metal and seal airtight. Patch existing insulation to match existing. Where existing ductwork is to be capped and reused, locate the end cap within 6” of the last branch. End caps shall be 3” pressure class and seal class “A”.

J. Temporarily cap all op enings to the sa nitary and vent system to prevent od or from entering the work area and building.

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. This Contractor is responsible for all penetrations of existing construction required to complete the work of this project. Refer to Section 15140 for additional requirements.

B. Penetrations in existing construction should be reviewed carefully prior to proceedin g with any work.

C. Penetrations shall be neat and clean with smooth and/or finished edges.

D. Repair existing construction as required after penetration is complete to restore to original condition. Use simil ar materials and match adjacent construction unless otherwise note d or agreed to by the Architect/Engineer prior to start of work.

E. This Contractor is responsible for all costs incurred in repair, relocations, or replacement of any cables, conduits, or other services if damaged without proper investigation.

3.5 CLEANING AND REPAIR

A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.


B. Clean all systems adja cent to project which a re affected by the d ust and debris caused by this construction.

END OF SECTION

MORTON COLLEGE DUCTWORK INSULATION Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 15290 DUCTWORK INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Ductwork Insulation.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1-2010 - Ene rgy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

B. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

C. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for the Behavior of Materials in a Ve rtical Tube Furnace at 750C.

D. ASTM E814 - Fire Tests of Through Penetrations Firestops.

E. National Commercial & Industrial Insulation Standards - 1999 Edition - a s published by Midwest Insulation Contractors Association and endorsed by National Insulation Contractors Association.

F. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

G. UL - XHEZ - Through Penetration Firestop Systems.

H. UL 263 - Full Scale External Fire Tests with Hose Stream.

I. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

J. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through Penetrations Firestops.


A. Applicator: Company specializing in ductwork insulation application with five years mi nimum experience. Whe n requested, installer shall submit manufacturer’s certificate indicating qualifications.

B. Materials: UL listed in Category HNKT; flame spread/smoke developed rating of 2 5/50 in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.

C. Adhesives: UL listed, meeting NFPA 90A/90B requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Type A: Flexible Fibe rglass - Out side Wrap; ANSI/ASTM C553; co mmercial grade; 0.28 maximum 'K' value at 75F; foil scrim kraft facing, 1.0 lb./cu. ft. density.

B. Type C: Flexible Fiberglass Liner; ANSI/ASTM C1071; 0.28 maximum 'K' value at 75F; 1.5 lb/cu ft minimum density; coated air side for 4000 fpm air velocity.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, codes, and industry standards.

B. Install materials after ductwork has been tested.

C. Clean surfaces for adhesives.

D. Provide insulation with vapor barrier when air conveyed may be below ambient temperature.

E. Exterior Duct Wrap - Flexible, Type A:

1. Apply with edges tightly butted.

2. Cut slightly longer than perimeter of duct to insure full thickness at corners. Do not wrap excessively tight.

3. Seal joints with adhesive backed tape.

4. Apply so insulation conforms uniformly and firmly to duct.

5. Provide high-density insulation inserts at trapeze duct hangers and straps to prevent crushing of insulation. Maintain continuous vapor barrier through the hanger.

6. Tape all joints with Royal Tapes #RT 350 (21 6-439-7229), Venture Tape 1525CW, or Compac Type FSK. No substitutions will be accepted without written permission from the Architect/Engineer.

7. Press tape tightly to the duct coverin g with a squeegee for a tig ht continuous seal. Fish mouths and loose tape edges are not acceptable.

8. Staples may be used, but must be covered with tape.

9. Vapor barrier must be continuous.

10. Mechanically fasten on 12" centers at b ottom of ducts over 24" wi de and on all sides of vertical ducts.

F. Interior Insulation - Flexible Duct Liner, Type C:

1. Observation of Duct Lining:

a. After installation of ductwork, Architect/Engineer may select random observation points in each system.

1) At each ob servation point, cut and remove an 1 8" x 18" section of ductwork and liner for verification of installation.

2) Random observation points ba sed on one opening per 75 li neal ft. of total duct run.

b. When any of the observation points shows non-compliance, additional points will be designated by the Architect/Engineer, and observation repeated.


c. If 20% of points observed do not comply, remove and replace all lined ducts and repeat tests. Where replacement is not required, correct all non-compliances.

d. At end of observatio n, repair all du ct lining and ob servation holes by installi ng standard, insulated, hinged access doors per Section 15910.

e. Paint or finish to match adjacent duct surfaces.

2. Impale on spindle anchors welded or mechanically fastened to the duct. Adhesive or glue fastened anchors are not acceptable. Maximum anchor spacing per SMACNA Duct Construction Standards or manufa cturer's recommendations, whichever is more restrictive. Locate pins less than 3" from corners and at intervals not over 6" around the perimeter at leading and trailing edges. Locate pins within 3" of transve rse joints and at intervals not over 16" long the length of the duct. Pins mu st be long en ough to prevent compressing the insulation.

3. In addition to anchors, secure liner with UL listed adhesive covering over 90% of the duct surface.

4. Install per the latest edition of the SMACNA Manual.

5. Leading edges shall be covered as follows:

a. For duct velocities below 3000 fpm, co at leading edges with adhesive. Neatly butt liner without gaps at transverse joints. Cut line r flush with end of the du ct section for tight joints with no exposed duct. If adhesive i s shop installed, field apply additional adhesive to the end of each duct section for complete adhesion of the liner. Protect edges from dirt and debris.

b. For duct velocities above 3000 fpm, cover leading edges with metal nosing. Use nosing on upstream edges of each section of duct. If the duct can be installed in either direction, provide n osing on ea ch end o r clearly mark the duct to allo w visual verification after installation. Verify duct velocities based on the scheduled air flow rates and determine where metal nosing is required.

c. Install metal nosing in the following locations (regardless of velocity):

1) The first three fittings downstream of all fans. 2) At all duct lin er interruptions. This includes fire dampers, access doors,

branch connections, and all other locations where the edge of the liner is exposed.

3) Trailing edges of transverse joints do not require metal nosings.

6. Overlap liner at longitudinal joints. Make longitudinal joints at corners of the duct unless the duct size does not allow this. Coat longitudinal joints with adhesive at velocities over 2500 fpm.

7. Seal all dam aged duct liner with a dhesive and gl ass cloth. Do not damag e duct liner surface coatings.

8. Duct dimensions given are net in side dimensions. Increase sheet metal to allow for insulation thickness.

G. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations unless code prohibits.

H. Provide 2" wide, 24" high , 26 gauge, galvanized sheet metal corne r protection angles for all externally insulated ductwork extending to a floor or curb.


3.2 SCHEDULE

A. Refer to Section 15890 for scheduling of insulation.

END OF SECTION

MORTON COLLEGE PLUMBING FIXTURES Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 2

SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. All plumbing fixtures.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A112.6.1M - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use.

B. ANSI A112.18.1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.

C. ANSI A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use).

D. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Title III.

E. The Energy Policy Act (EPAct) of 2005.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010. Submittals shall include fixture carriers for record purposes only. Engineer does not review or approve carriers except for manufacturer.

B. Include fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Wall Hung Fixture Carriers:

1. Material: All Metal, ASME/ANSI A112.6.1M.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Zurn, Smith, Wade, Josam, Watts, Mifab.

B. All fixtures shall be as scheduled on the drawings.

C. All fixtures shall be lea d free. Faucets, tr aps, stops, and oth er fixture accessori es shall not contain more lead than allowed per the latest State or Federal Act.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openi ngs before rough-in and installation.

B. Install each fixture with trap easily removable for servicing and cleaning. Use screwed tailpiece couplings. Connect fixture waste to stack with slip fitting.

MORTON COLLEGE PLUMBING FIXTURES Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 2 of 2

C. Provide fixtures with chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies, loose key sto ps, reducers, and escutcheons.

D. Install components level and plumb.

E. Caulk joint between finish floor a nd floor mounted fixtures and between finish walls and wall mounted fixtures with silicon caulk. Caulk the joint, between rim and fixture where a fixture builds into a counter top, with caulking compound. Refer to DIVISION 7 for "Caulking" requirements. Color to match fixture.

F. Where there is a possibility of water following pi pe brackets, etc., into a wall; caulk escutcheons, space around brackets, etc., to exclude water. Refer to DIVISION 7 for "Caulking" requirements.

G. All wall mounted fixtures shall have co mpatible carriers designed for their inte nded service and suitable for the space available and configuration of fixtures. All carriers shall extend to the floor and be anchored to the slab.

H. All water or waste piping for plumbing fixtures that is exposed shall be painted color selected by Architect.

I. All exposed water supply piping and fittings in a finished space to a shower valve, hose bibb, or other water outlet shall be chrome plated.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust stops or valves f or intended water flow rate to fixtures with out splashing, noise, or overflow.

B. At completion, clean plumbing fixtures, equipment, and faucet aerator screens.

3.3 FIXTURE ROUGH-IN SCHEDULE

A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with table on plumbing drawings of minimum sizes for particular fixtures.

END OF SECTION

MORTON COLLEGE TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 2

SECTION 15835 TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Electric Baseboard Heaters.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1-2010 - Ene rgy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.


A. All filters shall be UL listed Class 1 or Class 2.

B. All electrical equipment shall have a UL label.

C. Factory wired equipment shall conform to ANSI/NFPA 70.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings per Section 15010.

B. Submit catalog data including arrangements, cross sections of cabinets, grilles, bracing, typical elevations.

C. Submit schedules of equipment and enclosures indicating length, number of pieces of element and enclosure, corner pieces, end caps, cap strips, access doors, and comparison of specified to actual heat output.

D. Indicate mechanical and electrical service lo cations and requirements. Sh ow deviations from scheduled products.

E. Submit manufacturers' installation instructions.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to ASHRAE 90.1-2010.

1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data. In clude operating, installation, maintenance and repair data, and parts listings.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect units from physical damage by storing in protected areas and leaving factory covers in place.

MORTON COLLEGE TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 2 of 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRIC BASEBOARD HEATERS

A. Wall fin radiation with sloping top and full backplate.

B. Enclosures: 16 gauge steel with baked enamel finish.

C. Furnish end caps as required.

D. Heating Element: Stainless steel sheathed electric resistance element in aluminum t ubes mechanically expanded into aluminum fins.

E. Unit shall have an automatic-reset thermal cutout. Front surface shall not exceed 130ºF.

F. Unit mounted line voltage thermostat that doubles as disconnect.

G. Acceptable Manufacturers: Trane or Vulcan.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install all products per manufacturers' instructions.

B. Locate finned tube radiat ion as shown and run cover wall-to-wall, unless otherwise shown. Center elements under windows.

C. Protect units with protective covers during construction.

D. Comb all coils to repair bent fins.

3.2 CLEANING

A. After construction is complete, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of units. Vacuum clean coils and inside of cabinets.

B. Touch-up marred or scratched surfa ces of factory- finished cabinets, with materials furnished by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

MORTON COLLEGE DUCTWORK Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 8

SECTION 15890 DUCTWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Galvanized Ductwork B. Ductwork Sealants C. Rectangular Ductwork - Single Wall D. Round Ductwork - Single Wall E. Flexible Duct

1.2 REFERENCES: Conform to all applicable requirements of the following publications:

A. ADC Flexible Duct Performance and Installation Standards, 3rd Edition 1996.

B. ASHRAE - Handbook 2004 Systems and Equipment; Chapter 16 - Duct Construction.

C. ASHRAE - Handbook 2005 Fundamentals; Chapter 35 - Duct Design.

D. ASHRAE – Standard 90.1 “Energy Standard f or Buildings Except Lo w-Rise Residential Buildings”, latest published edition.

E. ASTM A167- Stainless & Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, & Strip.

F. ASTM A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

G. ASTM A90 - Standard Test Method for Weight [Mass] of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings.

H. ASTM A924 - Specification for Ge neral Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

I. ASTM E90-02 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions.

J. ASTM E413-87 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.

K. AWS D9.1M/D9.1 - Sheet Metal Welding Code.

L. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

M. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air- Conditioning Systems.

N. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - 2005 Edition.

O. SMACNA - Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards - 1999 Edition.

P. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors.

Q. UL 181A - Closure Systems for Use With Rigid Air Ducts and Air Connectors

R. UL 181B - Closure Systems for Use With Flexible Air Ducts and Air Connectors.


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Duct Sizes shown on drawings are inside clear dimensions. Maintain clear dimensions inside any lining.

B. Transitions are generally not shown in single-line ductwork. Where sizes change at a di vided flow fitting, the larger size shall continue through the fitting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GALVANIZED DUCTWORK

A. General Requirements:

1. Duct and reinforcement materials shall conform to ASTM A653 and A924.

2. Interior Ductwork and reinforcements: G60 galvanized (0.60 ounces per square foot total zinc coating for two sides per ASTM A90) unless noted otherwise.

3. Exterior Ductwork: G90 galvanized (0.90 ounces per square foot total zinc coating for two sides per ASTM A90) unless noted otherwise. G60 is not acceptable for exterior use.

4. Ductwork reinforcement shall be of galvanized steel.

5. Ductwork supports shall be of galvan ized or painted steel. Slip ca ble hangers are acceptable. Acceptable manufacturers are Gripple, Ductmate, Duro Dyne, or engineer approved.

6. All fasteners shall be galvanized or cadmium plated.

2.2 DUCTWORK SEALANTS

A. One part joint sealers shall be water-based mastic systems that meet the following requirements: maximum 48-hour cure time, service temperature of -20°F to +175°F, resistant to mold, m ildew and water, flame spre ad rating below 25 and smoke-developed rating below 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, suitable for all SMACNA seal classes and pressure classes. Mastic used to seal flexible ductwork shall be marked UL 181B-M. All other mastics shall be marked UL 181A-M.

B. Pressure sensitive tape used for seali ng ductwork shall be minimum 2.5-inch wide, listed and marked UL 181A-P, having minimum 60 oz/inch peel adhesion to steel, and service temperature range from -20°F to +250°F.

C. Where pressure sensitive tape is calle d for on d rawings and specifications for sealing flexible ductwork, tape shall be minimum 2.5-inch wide, UL 181 B-FX list ed, and marked tape having minimum 60 oz/inch peel adhesion to steel and service temperature range from -20°F to +250°F. Acceptable manufacturers include: Venture Tape 1581A, Compac #340, Scotch Foil Tape 3326, Polyken 339.

2.3 RECTANGULAR DUCT - SINGLE WALL


1. All ductwork gauges and reinforcements shall be as listed in SMACNA Duct Construction Standards Chapter 2. Where necessary to fi t in confined spaces, furnish heaviest duct gauge and least space consuming reinforcement.


2. Offsets and transitions shall not exceed the angles in Figure 4-7.

B. Exceptions and modifications to the 2005 HVAC Duct Construction Standards are:

1. All ducts shall be cross-broken or beaded.

2. Turning vanes shall be used in all 90° mitered elbows, unless clearly noted otherwise on the drawings. Vanes shall be as follows:

a. Type 1:

1) Description: Single wall t ype with 22-gauge (0.029”) or heavier vanes, 3-1/4" blade spacing, and 4 to 4-1 /2" radius. Vanes h emmed if recommended by runn er manufacturer. Runners shall h ave extra-long locking tabs. C-value independently tested at below 0.26. EZ Rai l II by Sheet Metal Connectors or equal.

2) Usage: Limited to 3,000 fpm and vane lengths 36” and under.

b. Turning vanes shall operate quietly. Repair or replace vanes that rattle or flutter.

c. Runners must be installed at a 45° angle. Elbows with different size inlet an d outlet must be radius type.

d. Omitting every other vane is prohibited.

3. Where smooth radius rectangular elbows are shown, they shal l be constructed per SMACNA Figure 4-2. Type RE1 shall be constructed with a centerline duct radius R/W of 1.0. Whe re shown on drawings, Type RE3 elbows with 3 vane s shall be u sed with centerline duct radius R/W of 0.6 (SMACNA r/W=0.1). RE1 or RE3 elbows may be used where mitered elbows are shown if space permits. Mitered elbows (with or without turning vanes) may not be substituted for radius elbows. Do not make br anch takeoffs within 4 du ct diameters on th e side of the duct d ownstream from the inside radius of radius elbows.

4. Rectangular branch and tee connections in ducts over 1” pressure class shall be 45° entry type per Figs. 4-5 and 4-6. Rectangular straight taps are not acceptable above 1” pressure class.

5. Bellmouth fittings shown on return duct inlets shall expand at a 60-de gree total angle horizontally and vertically (space permitting) and have length of at lea st 25% of the smallest duct dimension.

6. Round taps off rectan gular unlined ducts shall be flanged con ical or bellmouth type (equal to Buckley Bellmouth or Sheet Metal Connectors E-Z Tap), or 45° rectangular with transition to round (equal to Sheet M etal Connectors Inc. High Efficiency Takeoff). Straight taps are acceptable if pressure class is 1” or less, round duct is 12" diameter or less, and the tap is not located between fans and TAB devices.

7. All lined duct shall utilize dovetail joints where round or conical taps occur. The dovetail joints shall extend past the liner before being folded over.

8. Cushion heads are acceptable only downstream of TAB device s in ducts up to ± 2" pressure class, and must be less than 6” in length.

9. Slide-on flanged transverse joint systems are a cceptable provided they are a manufactured product that has bee n tested fo r conformance with Chapte r 2 of the


SMACNA HVAC Du ct Construction Standards for sheet and joint deflection at the specified pressure class.

a. Apply sealant to all inside corners. Holes at corners are not acceptable.

b. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ductmat e Industries - 25/35/45, Nexus, Mez, or WDCI. Other manufacturers must submit test data and fabrication standards and receive Engineer’s approval before any fabrication begins.

2.4 ROUND DUCTWORK - SINGLE WALL

A. Conform to applicable portions of Rectangular Duct Section. Round or flat oval ductwork may be substituted for rectangular ductwork where approved by the Engineer. The spiral seam ductwork shall meet the standards set forth in this sp ecification. The duct work shall meet or exceed the specified cross-sectional area and insulation requirements. The substitution shall be coordinated with all other trades prior to installation.

B. Snap lock seams are not permitted.

C. Flat oval duct in negative pressure applications shall have flat sides reinforced as requi red for rectangular ducts of the same gauge with dimensions equal to the flat span of the oval duct.

D. 90 elbows shall be smooth radius or have a minimum of five sections with mitered joints and R/D of at least 1.5.

E. Duct and fittings shall meet the requi red minimum gauges listed in cha pter 3 of the SMACNA requirements for the specified pressure class. Ribbed and lightweight duct are not permitted.

F. Ductwork shall be suitable for velocities up to 5,000 fpm.

G. Divided flow fittings may be made as separate fittings or factory installed taps with sound, airtight, continuous welds at intersection of fitting body and tap.

H. Spot weld and bond all fitting seams in the pressure shell. Coat galvanizing damaged by welding with corrosion resistant paint to match galvanized duct color.

I. Ducts with minor axis le ss than 22" shall be spiral seam type. Larger ducts may be rolled, longitudinal welded seam type. SMACNA seams RL-2 and RL-3 are not permitted.

J. Reinforce flat oval ducts with external angles. Internal tie rods are permitted only as indicated for rectangular ductwork.

K. Transverse Joint Connections:

1. Crimped joints are not permitted.

2. Ducts and fittings 36" in diamete r and smaller shall have slip joint conne ctions. Size fitting ends to slip inside mating duct sections with minimum 2-inch insertion length and a stop bead. Use inside slip couplings for duct-to-duct joints, and outside slip couplings for fitting-to-fitting joints.

3. Ducts and fittings larger than 36" shall have flanged connections.

4. Secure all joints with at least 3 sheet metal screws before sealing.


5. Slide-on flanges as manufactured by Ductmate Industries, Accuflange, or Sheet Metal Connectors are acceptable. Self-seal ing duct systems are also acceptable (Lindab, Ward “Keating Coupling”).

2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT

A. Flexible duct shall be listed and labeled as UL 181 Class 1 Air Duct Mate rial, and shall comply with NFPA 90A and 90B, and meet GSA, FHA and other U.S. Government agency standards. Flexible duct shall bear the ADC Seal of Certification.

B. Flame Spread/Smoke Developed: Not over 25/50.

C. Flexible duct shall have corrosion-resistant wire helix, bonded to a n inner liner that prevents air from contacting the i nsulation, covered with 1-1/2", 3/4 poun d density fiberglass insulation blanket, sheathed in a vapor barrier of metalized polyester film laminated to glass mesh.

D. Inner liner shall be airtight and suita ble for 6" WC static pressure through 10” diameter and shall be airtight and suitable for 4” WC static pressure 12” through 16” diameter. Outer jacket shall act as a vapor barrier only with permeance not over 0.1 perm per ASTM E96, Procedure A. "U" value shall not exceed 0.23 Btuh/ft2/ºF. Temp erature range of at lea st 0-180ºF. M aximum velocity of 4,000 fpm.

E. Usage:

1. Take-offs from supply ducts to inlets of terminal air boxes. Do not exceed 36" in length.

2. Connections to air inlets and outlets. Do not exceed 6'-0" in length.

F. Stretch all flexible duct to prevent sags and reduce air friction. Shorten and reinstall all sagging or loose flexible duct. Avoid sharp elbows. Elbows shall maintain 1.5 diameter centerline turning radius.

G. Install per the SMACNA Flexible Duct Manual. Se cure inner layer with draw band. Wrap with pressure sensitive tape for protection prior to installing draw band. Pressure sensitive tape alone is not acceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide openings in ducts for controllers.

B. Locate ducts with space around equipment for normal operation and maintenance.

C. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ducts to prevent dust from entering ductwork.

D. Repair all duct insulation and liner tears.

E. Install manual volume dampers in branch supply ducts so all outlets can be adjusted. Do not install dampers at air terminal device or in outlets, unless specifically shown.

F. Install flexible duct in accordance with the ADC Flexible Duct Performance and Installation Standards.


G. Install all exterior ductwork per SMACNA Fig. 6-3. Where drawings do not indicate otherwise, ductwork seams and joints shall be sealed watertight and pitched to shed water.

H. Support all duct systems in accordance with the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards: Metal and Flexible.

I. Adhesives, sealants, tapes, vapor retarders, films, and other supplementary materials added to ducts, plenums, housing panels, silencers, etc. shall have flame spread/smoke developed ratings of under 25/50 per ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.

3.2 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE

USAGE MATERIAL PRESSURE CLASS

SEAL CLASS

†

INSULATION (Refer to Specification Section 15290 for insulation types)

Supply Duct from Terminal Air Boxes to Outlets

Galvanized Sheet Metal - Rectangular

+2” A 1" thick Type C

Return Boots on Grilles

Galvanized Sheet Metal

-2" A 1" thick Type C

Ductwork Accessories (Fabric Flex Connectors, Equipment Flanges, etc.)

--- --- --- 1-1/2” thick Type A

† Seal Class is per SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual

3.3 DUCTWORK SEALING


1. Openings, such as rotating shafts, shall be sealed with bushings or similar.

2. Pressure sensitive tape shall not b e used as the primary sealant unless it has been certified to comply with UL-181A or UL-181B by an independent testing laboratory and the tape is used in accordance with that certification.

3. All connections shall be sealed in cluding, but n ot limited to, taps, other bra nch connections, access doors, access panels, and duct connections to equipment. Sealing that would void product listings is not required. Spiral lock seams need not be sealed.

4. Mastic-based duct sealants shall be applied to joints and seams in minimum 3 inch wide by 20 mil thick bands using brush, putty knife, trowel, or spray, unless manufacturer’s data sheet specifies other application methods or requirements.

B. For Seal Class A ducts, all transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct wall penetrations shall be sealed. Joints are inclusive of, but not limited to, girth joints, branch and sub-branch intersections, duct collar tap-ins, fitting subsections, louver and air terminal connections to ducts, access door and access panel frames and jambs, duct, plenum, and casing abutments to building


structures.

1. Continuously welded and locking-type longitudinal joints and seams in ducts operating at static pressures less than 2 in ches of water column pressure classification shall not require additional closure systems.

END OF SECTION


ELECTRONIC FILE TRANSMITTAL - CONTRACTOR

KJWW #: 13.0122.00 DATE:

PROJECT NAME: Morton - Interior Renovations SOFTWARE/RELEASE: AutoCAD 2011

LOCATION: FILE NAME:

ENGINEER: David Hickman TRANSFER METHOD:

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE: 1. KJWW Engineering (hereinafter referred to as “Consultant”) is providing electronic data to you

solely at your request and for your convenience, and makes no warranty as to the compatibility of these files with other hardware or software. By a ccepting and opening any of the electronic data files, you, as the u ser, accept full responsibility for its appli cation toward your intended use.

2. The electronic files are provided as a convenience to the Contractor and the electronic files are not to be used for pricing or construction purposes. The paper documents issued specifically for bidding and construction purposes are the contract documents upon which all pricing and construction should be based. It shal l be the Co ntractor's responsibility to coordinate all information issued by addenda, architect's supplemental instruction, change order or request for information with these electronic files.

3. Because data stored on electronic media can deteriorate undetected, transfer incorrectly, or can be modified without the Consultant’s knowledge, the Contractor agrees that the Consultant will not be held liable for the completeness or correctness of the electronic media.

4. These electronic files shall not be used, in whole or in part, for any proj ect other than the specific project referenced on this agreement for usage. Any other use will be at the complete risk of the Contractor and the Contractor shall hold the Engineer harmless for any unauthorized use, in whole or in part.

5. These electronic files were prepared by the Consultant and are instruments of the Consultant’s service for use solely with respect to this Project, and the Consultant will be deemed the Author of these d ocuments and will retain all common law, statutory, and othe r reserved rights, including the copyright. Enclosed are two copies. Please sign and return one copy and retain the other copy for your files.

Accepted by: Title:

Company: Phone:

Address: E-mail:

MORTON COLLEGE DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 1

SECTION 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Manual Volume Dampers.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

B. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Third Edition - 2005.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated.

B. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 x 30 inches.

C. Fabricate multi-blade damper of o pposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12" x 72". Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware.

D. Except in ro und ductwork 12 inche s and sm aller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide molded synthetic or oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings.

E. Provide locking quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.

F. On insulated ducts, mo unt quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting b rackets, bases, or adapters.

G. If blades are in open position and extend into the main duct, mount damper so blades are parallel to airflow.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION

MORTON COLLEGE AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 2

SECTION 15936 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Architectural Square Panel Diffusers.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. AMCA 500L-07 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.

B. ANSI/ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Inlets and Outlets.

C. ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1-2010 - Ene rgy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

D. ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

E. SMACNA - Duct Construction Standards.


A. Test and rate performance of air inlets and outlets per ASHRAE 70.

B. Test and rate performance of louvers per AMCA 500L-99.


A. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 90A.

B. Conform to ASHRAE 90.1-2010.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ARCHITECTURAL SQUARE PANEL DIFFUSERS

A. Reference to a diffuser means an ai r supply device, ceilin g mounted, tha t shall diffuse air uniformly throughout the conditioned space.

B. The type of unit, margin, material, finish, etc., shall be as shown on the drawing schedule. Flat-oval inlets are not acceptable for connection to flexible ducts.

C. All margins shall be compatible with ceiling types specified (including 'Thin-Line' T-bar lay-in grid system). An y discrepancies in contract documents should be brought to th e attention of the Architect/Engineer, in writing, prior to Bid Date. Submission of Bid indicates ceiling and air inlet and outlet types have been coordinated.

D. The capacity and size of the unit shall be as shown on the drawings.

E. All units shall handle the indicated cfm as shown on the drawings while not exceeding an NC level of 25, referen ced to 10 -12 watts with a 10 dB room effect. Noise in cla ssrooms may not exceed 35 dBA or 55 dBC per ANSI Standard S12.60-2002 and ASHRAE 70.

MORTON COLLEGE AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 2 of 2

F. Diffusers shall be Architectural solid square panel and flush with ceiling.

G. The exposed surface shall be smooth, flat and free of visible fasteners. The face panel shall be 22 gauge steel with a rolled edge or shall be 18 gauge with a smooth ground, uniform edge.

H. The back pan shall be one pi ece 22 gauge s tamped and shall include an integral inlet. (Welded inlets and corner joints are not acceptable).

I. Diffusers with a 24x24 back pan shall have a minimum 18x18 face panel size. Diffusers with a 12x12 back pan shall have a minimum 9x9 face panel size.

J. The face panel shall be mechanically fastened to the back panel with steel components. (Plastic fasteners are not acceptable.)

K. Acceptable Manufacturers: Tuttle & Bailey, Titus, Price, Nailor, Carnes, Krueger, Metalaire.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

B. Check location of inlets an d outlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.

C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connections.

D. Provide manual volume dampers on duct take-off to diffusers when there are multiple connections to a common duct. Locate volume dampers as far as possible from the air inlet or outlet.

END OF SECTION

MORTON COLLEGE BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 14

SECTION 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Requirements applicable to all Division 16 Se ctions. Also re fer to Divisi on 1 - General Requirements. This section is also applicable to Interior Communications Pathways Section 17130.

B. All materials and installation methods shall conform to the applicable stan dards, guidelines and codes referenced in each specification section.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Specification and the associated drawings govern furnishing, installing, testing and placing into satisfactory operation the Electrical Systems.

B. The Contractor shall furnish and install all new materials as indicated on the drawings, and/or in these specifications, and all items required to make his portion of the Electrical Work a finished and working system.

C. Description of Systems shall be as follows:

1. Electrical power system to and including light fixtures, equipment, devices, etc.

2. Extension of existing fire alarm system.

3. Wiring of equipment furnished by others.

4. Removal work and/or relocation and reuse of existing systems and equipment.

5. Technology Systems a s described in Division 17 and on the T-serie s documents as described in the Suggested Matrix of Scope Responsibility.

D. Work Not Included:

1. Temperature control wiring for plumbing and HVAC equipment (unless otherwise indicated) will be by other Contractors.

1.3 WORK SEQUENCE

A. All work that will produce ex cessive noise or interference with normal building operations, as determined by the Owner, shall be scheduled with the Owner. It may be necessary to schedule such work during unoccupied hours. The Owner reserves the right to determine when restricted construction hours are required.

1.4 DIVISION OF WORK BETWEEN MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, AND CONTROL CONTRACTORS

A. Division of work is the responsibility of the Prime Contractor. Any scope of work described at any location on the contract document shall be sufficient for including said requirement in the project. The Prime Contractor shall be solely responsible for determining the appropriate subcontractor for the described scope. In no case shall the project be assessed an additional cost for scope that is described on the contract documents on bid day. The following division of responsibility is a guideline based on typical industry practice.


B. Definitions:

1. "Mechanical Contractors" refers to t he Contractors listed in Division 15of thi s Specification.

2. “Technology Contractors” refers to the Contractors furnishing a nd installing systems listed in Division 17 of this Specification.

3. Motor Power Wiring: Th e single phase or 3 p hase wiring extending from t he power source (transformer, panelboard, feeder circuits, etc. ) through disconnect switches and motor controllers to, and including the connections to the terminals of the motor.

4. Motor Control Wiring: Th e wiring associated with the remote operation of the magnet ic coils of mag netic motor starters or relays, or the wiring that p ermits direct cycling of motors by means of devices in series with the motor power wiring. In the latter case, the devices are usually single phase, have "Manual-Off-Auto" provisions, and a re usually connected into the motor power wiring through a manual motor starter.

5. Control devices such as start-stop push buttons, thermostats, pressure switches, flow switches, relays, etc., generally represent the types of equipm ent associated with motor control wiring.

6. Motor control wiring is single phase and usually 120 volts. In some instances, the voltage will be the same as the motor power wiring. When the motor power wiring exceeds 120 volts, a control transformer is usually used to give a control voltage of 120 volts.

7. Temperature Control Wiring: Th e wiring associated with the operation of a motorized damper, solenoid valve o r motorized valve, et c., either m odulating or two-position, as opposed to wiring that di rectly powers or controls a motor used to drive equipment such as fans, pumps, etc. This wiring will be from a 120 volt source and may continue as 120 volt, or b e reduced in vo ltage (24 volt), in which case a control transformer shall be furnished as part of the temperature control wiring.

8. Control Motor: An electric device used to operate dampers, valves, etc. It may be two-position or modulating. Conventional characteristics of such a motor are 24 volts, 60 cycles, 1 phase, although other voltages may be encountered.

9. Low Voltage Technology Wiring: The wiring associated with the Technology Systems, used for analog or digital signals between equipment.

10. Telecommunications Rough-in: Relates specifically to the backboxes, necessary plaster rings and other miscellaneous hardware required for the i nstallation or mounting of telecommunications information outlets.

C. General:

1. The purpose of these Specification s is to outli ne the Electrical an d Mechanical Contractors’ responsibilities related to elect rical work required for item s such as temperature controls, mechanical equipment, fans, chillers, compressors, etc. The exact wiring requirements for much of the equ ipment cannot be determined until the systems have been selected and submittals approved. Therefore, the el ectrical drawings show only known wiring related to such items. All wiring not shown on the electrical drawings, but required for mechanical systems, is the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor.

2. Where the drawings require the Ele ctrical Contractor to wire between equipment furnished by the Mechanical Contractor, such wiring shall terminate at terminals provided


in the equipment. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish complete wiring diagrams and supervision to the Electrical Contractor and designate the te rminal numbers for correct wiring.

3. The Electrical Contractor shall establish electrical utility elevations prior to fabrication and installation. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate utility elevations with other trades. When a conflict arises, priority shall be as follows:

a. Lighting Fixtures b. Gravity flow piping, including steam and condensate. c. Electrical bus duct. d. Sheet metal. e. Cable trays, including access space. f. Other piping. g. Conduits and wireway.

D. Mechanical Contractor's Responsibility:

1. Assumes responsibility for internal wiring of all equipment furnished by the Mechanical Contractor.

2. Assumes all responsibility for miscel laneous items furnished by the Mech anical Contractor that require wiring but are not shown on the electrical drawings or specified in the Electrical Specification. If items such as relays, flow switches, or interlocks are required to make the m echanical system function correctly or are re quired by the manufacturer, they are the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor.

3. Assumes all responsibility for Temperat ure Control wiring, if the Temperature Control Contractor is a Subcontractor to the Mechanical Contractor.

4. This Contractor is responsible for coordination of utilities with all other Contractors. If any field coordination conflicts are found , the Contractor shall coordinate with othe r Contractors to determine a viable layout.

E. Temperature Control Contractor's or Subcontractor's Responsibility:

1. Wiring of all devices needed to make the Temperature Control System functional.

2. Verifying any control wi ring on the electr ical drawings as b eing by the Electrical Contractor. All wiring is required for the Control System, but not shown on the electrical drawings, is the responsibility of the Temperature Control Contractor or Subcontractor.

3. Coordinating equipment locations (such as PE’s, EP’s, relays, transformers, etc.) with the Electrical Contractor, where wiring of the equipment is by the Electrical Contractor.

F. Electrical Contractor's Responsibility:

1. Furnishes and installs all combination starters, manual starters and disconnect devices shown on the Electrical Drawings or indicated to be by the Electri cal Contractor in the Mechanical Drawings or Specifications.

2. Installs and wires all remote control devices furnished by the Mechanical Contractor or Temperature Control Contractor when such so noted on the Electrical Drawings.

3. Furnishes and installs motor control and temperature control wiring, when noted on the drawings.


4. Furnishes, installs, and connects all relays, etc., for auto matic shutdown of certain mechanical equipment (supply fans, exhaust fans, etc.) upon actuation of the F ire Alarm System.


G. General (Electrical/Technology):

1. “Electrical Contractor” as referred to herein shall be responsible for sco pe listed in Division 17 o f this spe cification when the “Suggested Matrix of Scope Responsibility” indicated work shall be furnished and installed by the EC. Refer to the Contract Documents for this “Suggested Matrix of Scope Responsibility”.

2. The purpose of the se Specifications is to outline the El ectrical and Technology Contractor's work responsibilities as rel ated to Telecomm unications Rough-in, conduit, cable tray, power wiring and Low Voltage Technology Wiring.

3. The exact wiring requirements for much of the equipment cannot be determined until the systems have been purchased and submittals approved. Therefore, only known wiring, conduits, raceways and electrical power related to such items is sho wn on the Technology drawings. Other wiring, conduits, raceways, junction boxes and electrical power not shown on the Technology Drawings but required for operation of the systems is the responsibility of the Technology Contractor and included in said Contractor’s bid.

4. Where the Electrical Contractor is required to install conduit, conduit sleeves and/or power connections in support of Technology systems, the final installation shall not b e until a coo rdination meeting between the Electrical Contractor and the Te chnology Contractor has convened to determin e the exact location a nd requirements of the installation.

5. Where the Electri cal Contractor is requir ed to install cable tray that will contain Low Voltage Technology Wiring, installation shall not begin prior to a coordination review of the cable tray shop drawings by the Technology Contractor.

H. Technology Contractor’s Responsibility:

1. Assumes all responsibility for the Lo w Voltage Technology Wiring of all systems, including cable support where open cable is specified.

2. Assumes all responsibility for all required backboxes, conduit and power connections not specifically shown a s being furnished and installed by the Ele ctrical Contractor on the “Suggested Matrix of Scope Responsibility”.

3. Assumes all responsibility for providi ng and installing all lad der rack an d other cable management hardware (as defined in here-in).

4. Responsible for providing the Electrical Contractor with the required grounding lugs or other hardware for each piece of Technology equipment which is required to be bonded to the telecommunications ground bar.




A. Contractor’s Responsibility Prior to Submitting Pricing/Bid Data:

1. The Contractor is re sponsible for con structing complete and operating systems. The Contractor acknowledges and u nderstands that the Contract Documents are a two-dimensional representation of a three-dimensional object, subject to human interpretation. This represen tation may include imperfect dat a, interpreted codes, utility guides, three-dimensional conflicts, and r equired field coo rdination items. Such deficiencies can be corrected when identified prior to ord ering material a nd starting installation. The Contractor agrees to carefully study and compare the individual Contract Documents and report at once in writing to the Arch itect/Engineer any deficiencies the Contractor may discover. The Contractor further agrees to require each subcontractor to likewise study the documents and report at once any deficiencies discovered.

2. The Contractor shall resolve all reported deficiencies with the Architect/Engineer prior to awarding any subcontracts, ordering material, or starting any work with the Contractor’s own employees. Any work p erformed prior to receipt of instructions from the Architect/Engineer will be done at the Contractor’s risk.

B. Qualifications:

1. Only products of reputable manufacturers as determined by the Engineer are acceptable.

2. All Contractors and subcontractors shall employ only workmen who are skilled in their trades. At all times, the number of apprentices at the job site shall be less than or equal to the number of journeymen at the job site.

C. Compliance with Codes, Laws, Ordinances:

1. Conform to a ll requirements of the Illinoi s School Codes, Laws, Ordinances and other regulations having jurisdiction over this installation.

2. If there is a discrepancy between the codes and regulations and these specifications, the Engineer shall determine the method or equipment used.

3. If the Contractor notes, at the time of bi dding, any parts of the drawings or specifications that do not comply with the codes or regulations, he shall inform the Architect/Engineer in writing, requesting a clarification. If there is in sufficient time for this procedu re, he shall submit with his proposal a separate price to make the system comply with the codes and regulations.

4. All changes to the system made after the letting of the contract to comply with codes or the requirements of the Insp ector, shall be made by the Contractor without cost to the Owner.

5. If there is a discrepancy between manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications, the manufacturer's recommendations shall govern.

6. If there are no local codes having jurisdiction, the current issue of the National Electrical Code shall be followed.

D. Permits, Fees, Taxes, Inspections:



2. Abide by all laws, re gulations, ordinances, and other rule s of the State or Political Subdivision where the work is do ne, or as required by any duly constituted public authority.

3. Pay all charges for permits or licenses.

4. Pay all fees and taxes imposed by State, Municipal, and other regulatory bodies.

5. Pay all charges arising out of required inspections by an authorized body.

6. Pay all cha rges arising out of required contract document reviews a ssociated with the project and as initiated by the Owner or authorized agency/consultant.

7. Where applicable, all fixtures, equipment and materials shall be listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. or a nationally recognized testing organization.

E. Examination of Drawings:

1. The drawings for the electrical work are completely diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangements and locations of equipment, outlets, etc., and the approximate sizes of equipment.

2. Contractor shall determine the exact locations of equipment and rough-ins, and the exact routing of raceways so as to best fit the layout of the job.

3. Scaling of the drawings will not be sufficient or accurate for determining these locations.

4. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in arrangements and locations, such changes shall be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

5. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items, such as junction boxes, pull boxes, conduit fittings, etc., may not be shown, but where required by other sections of the specifications or required for p roper installation of the work, such items shall be furnished and installed.

6. If an item is either shown on the d rawings or called for in the specifications, it shall be included in this contract.

7. The Contractor shall determine quantities and quality of material and equipment required from the documents. Where discrepancies arise between drawings, schedules and/or specifications, the greater and better quality number shall govern.

8. Where used in electrical documents the word “furnish” shall mean supply for u se, the word “install” shall mean connect up complete and ready for operation, and the word “provide” shall mean to supply for use and connect up complete and ready for operation.

9. Any item listed as furnished shall also be installed unless otherwise noted.

10. Any item listed as installed shall also be furnished unless otherwise noted.

F. Electronic Media/Files:










G. Field Measurements:

1. Verify all pertinent dimen sions at the j ob site befo re ordering any conduit, conductors, wireways, bus duct, fittings, etc.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


1. Submittals list:


Section Submittal Item

16510 Lighting 16570 Lighting Control System 16721 Fire Alarm and Detection Systems

B. In addition to the provisions of Division 1, the following provisions are required:

1. Submittals shall include all fabricati on, erection, layout, a nd setting drawings; manufacturers' standard drawings; schedules; descriptive literature, cat alogs and brochures; performance and test d ata; wiring and control diagrams; and all other drawings and descriptive data of materials of construction as may be required to show that the m aterials, equipment or systems and the location thereof conform to th e requirements of the contract documents.

2. The Contractor shall submit electronic copy of ea ch shop drawing for revie w by the Architect/Engineer BEFORE releasing any equipment for manufacture or shipment.

3. Review and markup air conditioning and ventilating contractor's layout drawings with electrical equipment and conduit routings for coordination.


4. Shop drawings that are larger than 11" x 17" or are plan size layout or erection drawings such as cable tray or bu sduct drawings, shall be submitted o n reproducible media. Submit one reproducible and one print of each drawing or plan. All Contractor approval stamps shall be on the reproducible.

5. The Contractor shall thoroughly review and approve all shop drawings before submitting them to the Architect/Engineer. CONTRACTOR’S APPROVAL STAMP IS REQUIRE D ON ALL SUBMITTALS. APPROVAL WILL INDICATE THE CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW of all material and a COM PLETE UNDERSTANDING OF EXACTLY WHAT IS TO BE FURNISHED. Contractor shall clearly mark all deviations from the contract documents on all submittals. IF THE CONTRACTOR DOES NOT MARK DE VIATIONS, THEN THE ITEM SHALL BE REQUIRED TO MEET ALL DRA WING AND SPECI FICATION REQUIREMENTS.

6. Each data sheet shall clearly show at the top of the sh eet what General Electrical Equipment Schedule symbol (and applicable variations and subscripts) that data sheet corresponds to.

7. Each data sheet sh all show the size, rating, style, finish, ma terial, catalog number, manufacturer name and product photos for each item to ensure compliance with these specifications.

8. Assemble all submittals in sets, such as panelboards, fire alarm, or lighting. All sets shall be identical and contain an index of the items enclosed with a general topic description on the cover.

9. Where more than one model is shown on a manufacturer's sheet, clearly indicate exactly which item and which data is relevant to the work.

10. Where the manufacturer lists multiple part numbers or options on a single data sheet, the part number and options to be used shall be clearly set apart from other part numbers shown on that sheet.

11. Failure to comply with the above shall be reason to resubmit all shop drawings.

12. The Engineer's responsibility shall be to re view one set of sho p drawing submittals for each product. If the first submittal is in complete or does not comply with the drawi ngs and/or specifications, the Contractor shall be responsible to bear the cost to the Owner, for the Engineer to recheck and handle the additional shop drawing submittals.

C. Provide Schedule of Values:

1. Application forms: Use AIA Document Cont inuation Sheets G703 (or similar) as the form for application.

2. Provide line items on the Schedule of Values including:

a. General Conditions (mobilization, bonds, insurance, etc.) b. Lighting c. Power d. Fire Alarm

3. Change orders shall have schedule of values broken out as listed above submitted with each change order.


4. Coordinate with the Proje ct Engineer the items included in the S chedule of Values. Th e intent is to n ot create schedules in addition to those the Electri cal Contractor normally submits to the General Contractor for payment.

1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Exercise care in transporting and handling to avoid damage to materials. Store materials on the site to prevent damage.

B. Keep all materials clean, dry and free from damaging environments.

C. Coordinate the in stallation of heavy a nd large equipment with the General Contractor and/or Owner. If th e Electrical Contractor does not have prior documented experience in rigging and lifting similar equipment, he/she shall contract with a qualified lifting and ri gging service that has similar documented experience. Follow all equipment lifting and support guidelines for handling and moving.

D. Contractor is respon sible for moving e quipment into the buildin g and/or site. Contra ctor shall review site prior to bid for path loca tions and any required b uilding modifications to a llow movement of equipment. Contractor shall coordinate his/her work with other trades.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Provide one-year warranty for all fixtures, equipment, materials, and workmanship.

B. The warranty period for all work in this spe cification Division shall commence on the d ate of Substantial Completion or successful system performance whichever occurs later. The warranty may also commence if a whole or partial system or any separate piece of equipment or component is put into use for the benefit of any party other than the installing contractor with prior written authorization of the Own er. In this in stance, the warranty period shall commence on the date when such whole system, partial system or separate piece of equipment or component is placed in operation and accepted in writing by the Owner.

C. Warranty requirements extend to correction, without cost to the Ow ner, of all work fou nd to be defective or nonconforming to the contract documents. The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting all damage due to defe cts or no nconformance with contract d ocuments excluding repairs required as a result of imp roper maintenance or operation, or of normal wear as determined by the Architect/Engineer.

1.9 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTION

A. Where several manufacturers’ names are given, the manufacturer for which a catalog num ber is given is the basis of design and establishes the quality required.

B. Equivalent equipment manufactured by the other named manufacturers may be used. Contractor shall ensure that all items submitted by these other manufacturers meet all re quirements of the drawings and specifications, and fit in the allo cated space. The Engineer shall make the fi nal determination of whether a product is equivalent.

C. Any material, article or equipment of other unnamed manufacturers which will adequately perform the services and duties imposed by t he design and is of a qu ality equal to or bette r than the material, article or equipment identified by t he drawings and specifications may be u sed if approval is secured in writing from the Ar chitect/Engineer via addendum. The Contractor assumes all costs incurred as a result of using the offered material, article or equipment, on his part or on the part of other Contractors whose work is affected.


D. Voluntary add or deduct prices for alternate materials may be listed on the bid form. These items will not be used in determi ning the low bidder. This Contractor assumes all costs incurred as a result of using the offered material or equipment on his part or on the part of other Contractors whose work is affected.

E. All material substitutions requested after the final addendum must be listed as voluntary changes on the bid form.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All items of material having a similar function (e.g., safety switches, p anelboards, switchboards, contactors, motor sta rters, dry type tran sformers) shall be of the same m anufacturer unless specifically stated otherwise on drawings or elsewhere in specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 JOBSITE SAFETY

A. Neither the professional activities of the Engineer, nor the presence of the Engineer or his or her employees and subconsultants at a co nstruction site, shall relieve the Contractor and any other entity of their obligations, duties and responsibilities including, but not limited to, construction means, methods, sequence, techniques or procedures necessary for performing, superintending or coordinating all portions of the work of construction in accordance with the contract documents and any health or safety precautions required by any regulatory agencies. The Engineer and his or her personnel have no authority to exerci se any control over any con struction contractor or other entity or their employees in connection with their work or any health or safety precautions. The Contractor is solely responsible for jo bsite safety. The Engineer and the En gineer’s consultants shall be in demnified and shall b e made additional insureds under the Contractor’s general liability insurance policy.

3.2 ENGINEER OBSERVATION OF WORK

A. The contractor shall provide seven (7) calendar days notice to the Engineer prior to:

1. Installing hard or suspended ceilings and soffits.

B. The Engineer will review the installation and provide a written report noting deficiencies requiring correction. The contractor’s schedule shall account for the se reviews and show them as line items in the approved schedule.

C. Above-Ceiling Final Observation:

1. All work above the ceilings must be complete prior to the Engineer’s review. This includes, but is not limited to:

a. All junction boxes are closed and identified in a ccordance with Section 16195 Electrical Identification.

b. Light fixtures, including ceiling-mounted exit and emerge ncy lights, are installed and operational.

c. Light fixture whips are suspended above the ceiling.


d. Conduit identification is i nstalled in accordance with Section 16195 Electrical Identification.

e. Light fixtures are suspended independently of the ceiling system when required by these contract documents.

f. All wall penetrations have been sealed.

2. In order to prevent the A bove-Ceiling Final Observation from occurring too early, the Contractor shall review the status of the work and certify, in writing, that the work is ready for the Above-Ceiling Final Observation.

3. It is understood that if the Engineer finds the ceilings have been installed prior to thi s review and prior to seve n days elap sing, the En gineer may not recomme nd further payments to the contractor until such time as full access has been provided.




1. In order to prevent the Final Jobsite Observation from occurring too early, the Contractor shall review the completion status of the project and certify that the job is ready for the final jobsite observation.

2. Attached to the end of this section is a typical list of items that represent the degree of job completeness expected prior to re questing a review. The Contractor shall sign th e attached certification and return it to the Architect/Engineer so that the final observatio n can be scheduled.

3. It is understood that if t he Engineer finds the job not ready for the final observation and additional trips and observations are required to bring the project to completion, the cost of the additional time and expenses incurred by the Engineers will be deducted from the Contractor’s final payment.


A. Submit three (3) p roperly indexed an d bound copies, in “D” ring style notebooks, of the Operations and Maintenance Instructions to t he Architect/Engineer. Make all corrections or additions required.

B. Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall include:

1. Notebooks shall be heavy duty locking three ring binde rs and inco rporate clear vinyl sheet sleeves on the front cover and spine for slip-in labeling. “Peel and stick” labels are not acceptable. Sheet lifters shall be supplied at the front of each notebook. Provide “Wilson-Jones” or eq ual, color black. Size notebooks a minimum of 1/2" thicker than material for future inserts. Label th e spine and front cover of each notebook. If more than one notebook is required, label in consecutive order. For example; 1 of 2, 2 of 2. No other forms of binding will be acceptable.

2. Prepare binder covers (front and spine) with printed title “Op eration and Maintenance Instructions”, title of project, and sub ject matter o f binder whe n multiple bi nders are required.


3. Title page with project title, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, and Subcontractor with addresses, telephone numbers, and contacts.

4. Table of Contents describing all index tabs.

5. Listing of all Subcontractors and major equipment suppliers with addresses, telephone numbers, and contacts.

6. Index tabs dividing information by specification section, major equipment, or systems. All tab titles sha ll be cl early printed under reinforced plastic tabs. Label all equipment to match the identification in the construction documents.

7. Copies of warranties.

8. Copies of all final approved shop drawings and submittals. Copy of power system study and overcurrent protective device settings.

9. Copies of all factory inspection and/or equipment start-up reports.

C. Operation and maintenance data shall consist of written instructions for the care, maintenance, and operation of the equi pment and systems. Instruction books, cards, manuals furnished with the equipment shall be included.

3.5 INSTRUCTING THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE

A. Adequately instruct the Owner's designated representatives in the m aintenance, care, and operation of the complete systems installed under this contract.

B. Provide verbal and written instructions to the Owner's representatives by FACT ORY PERSONNEL in the care, maintenance, and operation of the equipment and systems.

C. The Owner has the option to make a video re cording of all instructions. Coordinate schedule of instructions to facilitate this recording.

D. The instructions shall include:

1. Maintenance of equipment. 2. Start-up procedures for all major equipment. 3. Description of emergency system operation.

E. Minimum hours of in struction time for each item and/or system shall b e as i ndicated in e ach individual specification section.

F. Operating Instructions:

1. Contractor is responsible for all i nstructions to th e Owner’s representatives for the electrical and specialized systems.

2. If the Contractor does not have staff that can adequately provide th e required instructions, he shall include in his bid an adequate amount to reimburse the Owner for the Engineer to perform these services.




B. Maintain at the job site a separate and complete set of electrical drawings and specifications with all changes made to the systems clearly and permanently marked in complete detail.

C. Mark drawings and specifications to indicate approved substitutions; Change Orders, and actual equipment and materials used. All Chang e Orders, RFI respo nses, Clarifications and other supplemental instructions shall be marked o n the d ocuments. Record documents that me rely reference the existence of the ab ove items are not acceptable. Should this Contractor fail to complete Record Documents as required by this contract, this Cont ractor shall reim burse Architect/Engineer for all costs to develop record documents that comply with this requirement. Reimbursement shall b e made at the Architect/Engineer’s hourly rates in effe ct at the time of work.

D. Record changes daily and keep the marked drawings available for the Archite ct/Engineer's examination at any normal work time.

E. Upon completing the job, and befo re final payment is made, give the marked-up drawings to the Architect/Engineer.


A. Thoroughly clean all equipment and systems prior to the Owner's final acceptance of the project.

B. Clean all foreign paint, grease, oil, dirt, labels, stickers, etc. from all equipment.

C. Remove all rubbish, debris, etc., accumulated during construction from the premises.

3.8 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate the installation of all equipm ent, controls, devices, etc., with other trade s to maintain clear access area for servicing.

B. Install all equ ipment to maximize access to parts needing service or maintenance. Review the final location, placement, and orientation of equipment with the Owner’s representative prior to setting equipment.

C. Installation of equipment or devices without regard to coordination of access requireme nts and confirmation with the Owner’s representative will result in removal and reinstallation of the equipment at the Contractor’s expense.

3.9 INDOOR AIR QUALITY (IAQ) MAINTENANCE FOR OCCUPIED FACILITIES UNDER CONSTRUCTION

A. Within the limits of Construction:

1. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate all work with the contractor responsible for IAQ.

2. The means, methods and materials used by t he Electrical Contractor shall be coordinated with the contractor responsible for IA Q and shall comply with the IAQ requirements set forth in Division 1 and Division 15of these specifications.

B. Outside the limits of Construction:

1. IAQ shall be the responsibility of the electrical contractor for work that is required outside the limits of construction.

2. The Electrical Contractor is responsible for the IAQ set forth in Division 1 and Division 15 of these specifications.


3. The Electrical Contractor shall review and coordinate all IAQ pla ns and procedures with the owner’s IAQ representative.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. General:

1. Conduct all tests required during and after construction.

2. Supply necessary instruments, meters, etc., for the tests. Supply competent technicians with training in the proper testing techniques.

3. All cables and wires shall be tested fo r shorts and grounds following installation and connection to devices. Replace shorted or grounded wires and cables.

4. Any wiring device, electrical apparatus or lighting fixture, if grou nded or shorted on any integral "live" part, shall have all defective parts or materials replaced.

5. If the results obtained in the tests are not satisfactory make adjustments, replacements, and changes as nee ded. Then re peat the tests, and ma ke additional tests, as the Architect/Engineer or authority having jurisdiction deems necessary.

B. Other Equipment:

1. Give other equipment furnished and installed by the Contractor all standard tests normally made to assure that the equipment is electrically sound, all connections properly made, phase rotation correct, fuses and thermal elements suitable for protection against overloads, voltage complies with equipment nameplate rating, and full load amperes are within equipment rating.

C. If any test results are not satisfactory, make adjustments, replacements and changes as needed and repeat the test s and make additional tests as the Architect/Engineer or authority ha ving jurisdiction deem necessary.

END OF SECTION

MORTON COLLEGE ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 16060 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Electrical demolition

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Materials and equipment for pat ching and exten ding work shall be a s specified in indivi dual Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. THE DRAWINGS ARE INTENDED TO INDICATE THE SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED AND DO NOT INDICATE EVERY BOX, CONDUIT, OR WIRE THAT MUST BE REMOVED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE PRIOR TO SUBMITTING A BID AND VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS.

B. Where walls, ceilings, structures, etc., are indi cated as being removed on general drawings, the Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of all el ectrical equipment, devices, fixtures, raceways, wiring, systems, etc., from the removed area.

C. Where ceilings, walls, st ructures, etc., are te mporarily removed and repla ced by others, this Contractor shall be responsible for the removal, storage, and replacement of equipment, devices, fixtures, raceways, wiring, systems, etc.

D. Where mechanical or te chnology equipment is indicated as being re moved on ele ctrical, mechanical, or tech nology drawings, the Cont ractor shall b e responsible for disconne cting the equipment and removing all starters, VFD, controllers, electrical equipment, raceways, wiring, etc. associated with the device.

E. Verify that aband oned wiring and equipment serve only aba ndoned equipment or fa cilities. Extend conduit and wire to facilities and equipm ent that will remain in operation following demolition. Extension of conduit and wire to equipment shall be compatible with the surrounding area. Extended conduit and conductors to match existing size and material.

F. Coordinate scope of work with all other Contractors and the Owner at the project site. Schedule removal of equipment and electrical service to avoid conflicts.

G. Bid submittal shall mean the Contractor has visited the project site and has verified existing conditions and scope of work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, structures, and ceilings scheduled for removal.


B. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. Assu me all equipment and systems must remain o perational unless specifically noted otherwise on drawings.

3.3 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of Division 1 of Specifications and this Section.

B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

C. Remove abandoned wiring and raceway to source of supply.

D. Remove exposed abandoned raceway, including abandoned raceway above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut race way flush with wall s and floors, and patch surfaces. Remove all associated clamps, hangers, supports, etc. associated with raceway removal.

E. Disconnect and remove outlets and devices that a re to be dem olished. Remove conduit and conductors back to source. Devices’ back box and conduit mounted in walls that are to re main can be abandoned in pla ce. Provide appropriate cover plate fo r all aban doned back boxes, matching cover plate material specified on project material list.

F. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment servin g utilization equipment that has been removed.

G. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. Patch openings to match existing surrounding finishes.

H. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.

I. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified. Extended conduit and conductors to match existing size and material.

J. HID and fluorescent lamps, determined by th e Toxicity Characteristic Leachate procedure (TCLP), to be hazardous waste shall be disposed of in a permitted hazardous waste disposal facility or by a permitted lamp recycler.

K. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

L. This Contractor is responsible for all costs incurred in repair, relocations, or replacement of any cables, conduits, or other services if damaged without proper investigation.


A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or are to be reused.

B. Panelboards: For panels in whi ch new circuits are being pulled, clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for v acant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.

C. Luminaires: Remove exi sting luminaires for cleaning as indicated on the d rawings. Use mild detergent to clean all exterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace


lamps and broken electrical parts. Replacement parts shall match specified components for new fixtures of same type when applicable. Reinstall luminaire and connect to circuiting as indicated on drawings.

D. ELECTRICAL ITEMS (E. G., LIGHTING FIXT URES, RECEPTACLES, SWITCHES, CONDUIT, WIRE, ETC.) REMOVED AND NOT RELOCATED REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF THE OWNER. CONTRACTOR SHALL PLACE ITEMS RETA INED BY THE OWNER IN A LOCATION COORDINATED WITH THE OWNER. T HE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL THE OWNER DOES NOT WANT.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Install relocated materials and equipment under the provisions of Division 1 of Specifications.

END OF SECTION

MORTON COLLEGE THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 16080 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Through-Penetration Firestopping.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials B. ANSI/UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops C. UL Fire Resistance Directory Through Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ) D. Warnock Hersey - Directory of Listed Products E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials F. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops G. The Building Officials and Code Administrators National Building Code H. 2009 International Building Code I. NFPA 5000 – Building Construction Safety Code

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: For penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openi ngs and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls including fire partitions, fire barriers, and smoke barriers. 2. Fire-resistance-rated horizontal assemblies including floors, floor/ceiling assemblies, and

ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies.

B. Rated Systems: P rovide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per UL 1479:

1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than that equalin g or e xceeding fire-resistance rating of con structions penetrated.

2. T-Rated Systems: Fo r the followi ng conditions, provide th rough-penetration firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings:

a. Floor penetrations located outside wall cavities. b. Floor penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.

C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to light, traffic, moisture, or physical damage, provide products that, after cu ring, do not det eriorate when exposed to the se conditions both during and after construction.

D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, prov ide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determi ned per ASTM E 84.

E. For through-penetration firestop systems in air plenums, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 50, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.



A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section.

B. Installer: Individuals performing work shall be certified by the manufacturer of the system selected for installation.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store, protect and handl e products on site. A ccept material on site in facto ry containers and packing. Inspect for damage. Protect from deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for storage.

B. Install material prior to expiration of product shelf life.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide one year warranty on parts and labor.

B. Warranty shall cover rep air or repla cement of firestop systems which fail in joint adhe sion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance, general durability, or appear to deteriorate in any manner not clearly specified by the manufacturer as an inherent quality of the material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to co mpliance with requirements, provide o ne of the through-pen etration firestop systems indicated for each application that are p roduced by o ne of the follo wing manufacturers. All firestopping systems installed shall be provided by a single manufacturer.

1. 3M; Fire Protection Produces Division. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. RectorSeal Corporation, Metacaulk. 4. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division. 5. Johns-Manville. 6. Specified Technologies Inc. (S.T.I.) 7. Spec Seal Firestop Products 8. AD Firebarrier Protection Systems 9. Wiremold/legrand: FlameStopper

2.2 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

A. Provide materials and systems classified by or listed by Warnock Hersey to provide firestopping equal to time rating of construction being penetrated.

B. All firestopping materials shall be free of asbestos, lead, PCB’s, and other materials that would require hazardous waste removal.

C. Firestopping shall be flexible to allow for normal penetrating item movement due to exp ansion and contraction.

D. Firestopping systems for plumbing and wet pipe sprinkler piping shall be moisture resistant.


E. Provide firestopping systems capable of supporting floor lo ads where systems are exposed to possible floor loading or traffic.

F. Provide firestopping systems allowing continuous insulation for all insulated pipes.

G. Provide firestopping systems classified by UL or listed by Warnock Hersey for p enetrations through all fire rated construction. Firestopping systems shall be selected from the UL or listed by Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory Category XHEZ based on substrate construction and penetrating item size and material and shall fall within the range of numbers listed:

1. Combustible Framed Floors and Chase Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated F Rating = Floor/Wall Rating T Rating = Floor/Wall Rating

Penetrating Item UL System No. No Penetrating Item FC 0000-0999* Metallic Pipe or Conduit FC 1000-1999 Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit FC 2000-2999 Electrical Cables FC 3000-3999 Cable Trays FC 4000-4999 Insulated Pipes FC 5000-5999 Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical FC 6000-6999 Duct without Damper and Misc. Mechanical FC 7000-7999 Multiple Penetrations FC 8000-8999

2. Non-Combustible Framed Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated F Rating = Wall Rating T Rating = 0

Penetrating Item UL System No. No Penetrating Item WL 0000-0999* Metallic Pipe or Conduit WL 1000-1999 Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit WL 2000-2999 Electrical Cables WL 3000-3999 Cable Trays WL 4000-4999 Insulated Pipes WL 5000-5999 Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical WL 6000-6999 Duct without Damper and Misc. Mechanical WL 7000-7999 Multiple Penetrations WL 8000-8999

3. Concrete or Masonry Floors and Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated F Rating = Wall/Floor Rating T Rating (Floors) = Floor Rating

Penetrating Item UL System No. No Penetrating Item CAJ 0000-0999* Metallic Pipe or Conduit CAJ 1000-1999 Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit CAJ 2000-2999 Electrical Cables CAJ 3000-3999 Cable Trays CAJ 4000-4999 Insulated Pipes CAJ 5000-5999 Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical CAJ 6000-6999


Penetrating Item UL System No. Duct without Damper and Misc. Mechanical CAJ 7000-7999 Multiple Penetrations CAJ 8000-8999

*Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to match original rated construction.

H. Any opening in walls or floors not covered by the listed series of numbers shall be coordinated with the firestopping manufacturer.

I. Any openings in floors or walls not described in the UL or listed by Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory, or outlined i n manufacturer’s information shall be sealed in a manner agreed upon by the Firestopping Manufacturer, Owner, and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Ensure all surfaces that contact seal materials are free of dirt, dust, grease, oil, ru st, or l oose materials. Clean and repair surfaces as required. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Ensure substrate and pe netrating items have be en permanently installed prior to installing firestopping systems. Ensure pe netrating items hav e been p roperly spaced and have p roper clearance prior to installing firestopping systems.

C. Surfaces to which sealing materials are to be installed must meet the selected UL or Warnock Hersey system substrate criteria.

D. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by thro ugh-penetration firestop system manufacturer. Confine primer to area of bond.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. In existing construction, provide firestopping of openings prior to a nd after installation of penetrating items. Remove any existi ng coatings on surfaces prior to fire stopping installation. Temporary firestopping shall consist of packing openings with fire resistant mineral wool for the full thickness of substrate, or an alternate method approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. All openings shall be temporarily firestopped immediately upon their installation and shall remain so until the permanent UL or listed by Warnock Hersey listed firestopping system is installed.

B. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instructions of th e UL o r Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory and with the manufacturer’s printed application instructions.

C. Install dams as re quired to prope rly contain firestopping materials within openings and as required to achi eve required fire re sistance rating. Remov e combustible damming after appropriate curing.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean excess fill material s adjacent to openin gs as Work pro gresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in wr iting by through -penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not cause damage.


B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.4 INSPECTION

A. All penetrations shall be inspected by the manufacturer’s representative to ensure p roper installation.

B. Access to firestop systems shall be maintained for examin ation by the Authority Having Jurisdiction at their request.

C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop system with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.

D. The contractor shall allow for visual destructive review of 5 % of installed firestop systems (minimum of one) to prove compliance with specifications and manufacturer’s instructions and details. Destructive system removal shall be performed by the contractor and witnessed by the engineer and manufacturer’s factory representative. The engineer shall have sole discretion of which firestop system installations will be reviewed. The contractor is responsible for all costs associated with this requirement including labor and material for removing and replacing the installed firestop system. If any firestop system is found to not be installed per manufacturer’s specific instructions and details, all firestop systems are subject to d estructive review and replacement at the engineer’s discretion and the contractor’s expense.

END OF SECTION

MORTON COLLEGE CONDUIT AND BOXES Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 9

SECTION 16111 CONDUIT AND BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings B. Flexible metallic conduit and fittings C. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes D. Pull and junction boxes E. Accessories

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc-Coated 2. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc-Coated and Fittings 3. ANSI C80.4 - Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing 4. ANSI C80.6 – Intermediate Metal Conduit, Zinc Coated 5. ANSI/NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports 6. ANSI/NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports

B. Federal Specifications (FS):

1. A–A–50553A – Fittings for Conduit, Metal, Rigid, (Thick-Wall and Thin-Wall (EMT) Type 2. A–A–55810 – Specification for Flexible Metal Conduit

C. NECA “Standards of Installation”

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 – Fittings, Cast M etal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing and Cable

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. ANSI/NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code

F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): Applicable Listings

1. UL 1 – Flexible Metal Conduit 2. UL 6 – Rigid Metal Conduit 3. UL514-B – Conduit Tubing and Cable Fittings 4. UL797 – Electrical Metal Tubing

G. Definitions:

1. Fittings: Conduit connection or coupling.

2. Body: Enlarged fittings with opening allowing access to th e conductors for pulli ng purposes only.

3. Mechanical Spaces: Enclo sed areas, usually kept separated from the gen eral public, where the primary use is to ho use service equipment and to route services. These


spaces generally have exposed structures , bare concrete and non -architecturally emphasized finishes.

4. Finished Spaces: Enclosed areas where the primary use is to house personnel and the general public. These spaces generally have architecturally emphasized finishes, ceilings and/or floors.

5. Concealed: Not visible by the general public. Often indicates a location either above the ceiling, in the walls, in o r beneath the floor slab, in column coverings, o r in the ceiling construction.

6. Above Grade: Not directly in contact with the earth. For example, an interior wall located at an elevati on below the finished grade shall be considered above grade but a wall retaining earth shall be considered below grade.

7. Slab: Horizontal pour of concrete used for the purpose of a floor or sub-floor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) AND FITTINGS

A. Minimum Size Electrical Metallic Tubing: 3/4 inch, unless otherwise noted.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers of EMT Conduit: Allied, LTV, Steelduct, Wheatl and Tube Co, or approved equal.

C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies:

1. 2" Diameter or Smaller: Compression or steel set screw type of steel designed for their specific application.

2. Larger than 2": Compression or steel set screw type of steel d esigned for their specific application.

3. Acceptable Manufacturers of EMT Conduit Fittings: Appleton Electric, O-Z/Gedney Co., Electroline, Raco, Bridgeport, Midwest, Regal, Thomas & Betts, or approved equal.

2.2 FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT (FMC) AND FITTINGS

A. Minimum Size Galvanized Steel: 3/4 inch, unle ss otherwise noted. Lighting branch circuit wiring to an individual luminaire may be a ma nufactured, UL listed 3/8” flexible metal conduit with #12 AWG THHN conductors and an insulated ground wire.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: American Flex, Alflex, Electri-Flex Co, or approved equal.

C. Construction: Flexible ste el, approved for conduit ground, zinc coated, threadless type formed from a continuous length of spirally wound, interlocked zinc coated strip steel. Provide a separate equipment grounding conductor when used for equipment where flexibility is required.

D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies:

1. Threadless hinged clamp type, galvanized zinc coated cadmium plated malleable cast iron or screw-in type, die-cast zinc.

2. Fittings and conduit bodies shall incl ude plastic or cast metal i nserts supplied by the manufacturer to protect conductors from sharp edges.


3. Acceptable Manufacturers: O -Z/Gedney Co., Thomas & Bet ts, Appleton Electric, Electroline, Bridgeport, Midwest, Regal, or approved equal.

2.3 OUTLET BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel, minimum of 14 gauge, with 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required.

B. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 2.

C. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB1, Type FD, Aluminum or cast feralloy, deep type , gasketed cover, threaded hubs.

D. Outlet boxes for light fixtures to be 4" octagon box not less than 1-1/2" deep, deeper if required by the number of wires or construction.

E. Switch outlet boxes for local light control switches shall be 4 inches square by 1-1/2 inches deep, with raised cover to fit flush with finish wall line. Multiple gang switch outlets shall consist of the required number of gang boxes app ropriate to the quantity of switches comprising the gang. Where walls are plastered, provide a pla ster raised cover. Where switch outlet boxes occur in exposed concrete block walls, boxes shall be instal led in the blo ck cavity with a raised sq uare edge tile cover of sufficient depth to extend out to face of block or masonry boxes.

F. Wall or column receptacle outlet boxes shall be 4 inches square with raised cover to fit flush with finished wall line. Boxes in concrete block walls shall be installed the same as for switch boxes in block walls.

2.4 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel.

B. Sheet metal boxes larger than 12 inches in any dimension that contai n terminations or components: Continuous hinged enclosure with 1/4 turn latch and white back panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components.

C. Flanged type boxes shall be used where installed flush in wall.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Fire Rated Moldable Pads: UL #9700, moldable sheet putty at required thickness on all five sides of back boxes. Kinetics Noise Control – IsoBacker Pad, SpecSeal – SSP Putty and Pads, 3M #MPP-4S or equal.

B. Sound Barrier Insulation Pads: Mastic, non-hardening, sheet material, minimum 1/8" thickness applied to all five side s of back boxe s. Kinetics Noise Control – SealTight B acker Pad, L.H. DOTTIE Co., #68 or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUIT SIZING

A. Size conduit as shown on the drawings and specifications. Where not indicated in the co ntract documents, conduit size shall be according to N.E.C. (Latest Edition). Conduit and conductor sizing shall be coordinated to limit con ductor fill to less than 40 %, maintain conductor ampere capacity as required by t he National Electrical Code (to include enlarged conductors due to


temperature and quantity derating values) and to prevent excessive voltage drop a nd pulling tension due to long conduit/conductor lengths.

B. Minimum Conduit Size (Unless Noted Otherwise): 3/4 inch.

3.2 CONDUIT ARRANGEMENT

A. In general, conduit shall be installed concealed in walls, in finished spaces and where possible or practical, or as noted otherwise. In unfinished spaces, mechanical and utility areas, conduit may run either concealed or exposed as conditions dictate and as practical unless noted otherwise on drawings. Installation shall maintain headroom in exposed vicinities of p edestrian or vehicular traffic.

B. Conduit runs shall be routed as sho wn on l arge scale drawings. Conduit routing on drawings scaled 1/4"=1'-0" or less shall be considered diagrammatic, unless noted otherwise. The correct routing, when shown diagrammatically shall be chosen by the Contractor based on information in the contract documents, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable codes, the NECA's "Standard of Installation", in acco rdance with recognized industry standards, and coordinated with other contractors.

C. Contractor shall adapt his work to the j ob conditions and make such changes as requi red and permitted by the Archite ct/Engineer, such as moving to clear beams and joists, adjusting at columns, avoiding interference with windo ws, etc., to pe rmit the proper installation of other mechanical and/or electrical equipment.

D. Contractor shall co operate with all Co ntractors on the project. He shall obt ain details of othe r Contractor's work in order to ensure fit and avoid conflict. Any expense due to the failure of This Contractor to do so shall be paid for in full by him. The other trades involved as directed by the Architect/Engineer shall perform the repair of work damaged as a result of neglect or error by This Contractor. The resultant costs shall be borne by This Contractor.

3.3 CONDUIT SUPPORT

A. Conduit runs installed above a suspended ceiling shall be properly supported. In no case shall conduit rest on the suspended ceiling construction, nor utilize ceiling support system for conduit support.

B. Conduit shall not b e supported from ductwork, water, sprinkler piping, or other non -structural members, unless approved by the Architect/Engineer. All supports shall be from structural slabs, walls, structural members, and bar joists, and coordinated with all other applicable contractors, unless noted otherwise.

C. Conduit shall be held in place by the correct size of galvanized one-hole conduit clamps, two-hole conduit straps, patented support devices, clamp back conduit hangers, or by other me ans if called for on the drawings.

D. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.

E. Spring-steel conduit clips specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used in lieu of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2" and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above accessible ceilings and for securing raceways to slotted channel and angle supports.

F. Group conduits in pa rallel runs where practical and use condu it racks or trapeze hangers constructed of steel channel, suspended with threaded solid rods or wall mounted from metal


channels with conduit straps or clamps. Provide space in each rack or trapeze for 25% additional conduits.

G. Do not exceed 25 lbs. per hanger and a minimum spacing of 2’-0” on center when attaching to metal roof decking (excludes concrete on metal deck). This 25 lbs. load and 2’-0” spacing include adjacent electrical and mechanical items hanging from deck. If the hanger restrictions cannot be achieved, supplemental framing off steel framing will need to be added.

H. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.

I. Supports for metallic conduit shall be no greater than 10 feet. A smaller interval may be used if necessitated by building construction, but in no event shall sup port spans exceed the Nati onal Electrical Code requirements. Conduit shall be securely fastened within 3 feet of each outlet box, junction box, device box, cabinet, or fitting.

J. Supports of flexible conduit shall be within 12 inches of each outlet box, junction box, device box, cabinet, or fitting and at intervals not to exceed 4.5 feet.

K. Supports for non-metallic conduit shall be at sufficiently close intervals to eliminate any sag in the conduit. The manufa cturer's recommendations shall be followed, but in no event shall support spans exceed the National Electrical Code requirements.

L. Finish:

1. Trim all ends of exposed field fabricated steel hangers, slotted channel and threaded rod to within 1” of support or fastener to eliminate potential injury to personnel unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Smooth ends and install elastomeric insulation with two coats of latex paint if exposed steel is within 6’-6” of finish floor and presents potential injury to personnel.

3.4 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. Conduit Connections:

1. Shorter than standard conduit lengths shall be cut square using industry standards. The ends of all conduits cut shall be reamed or otherwise finished to remove all rough edges.

2. Where conduits with tap ered threads cannot be coupled with standard couplings, then approved split or Erickson couplings shall be used. Running threads will not be permitted.

3. Install expansion/deflection joints where conduit crosses structure expansion/seismic joints.

B. Conduit terminations for all low voltage wiring shall have nylon bushings installed on each end of every conduit run.

C. Conduit Bends:

1. Use a hydraulic one-shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in conduit 2" in size or larger. All steel conduit bending shall be done cold; no heating of steel conduit shall be permitted.

2. A run of conduit shall not contain more than th e equivalent of f our (4) quarter bends (360), including those bends located immediately at the outlet or body.


3. Telecommunications conduits shall have no more than two (2) 90 degree bends between pull points and contain no continuous sections longer than 100 feet. Insert pull points or pull boxes for conduits exceeding 100 feet in length.

a. A third bend is acceptable if:

1) The total run is not longer than (33) feet. 2) The conduit size is increased to the next trade size.

4. Telecommunications pull boxes shall not be used in lieu of a be nd. Align conduits that enter into the pull box from opposite ends with each other. Pull box size shall be twelve (12) times t he diameter of the large st conduit. Slip sleeve s or gutters can be used in place of a pull box.

5. Telecommunications conduit bend radius shall be six (6) times the diameter for conduits under 2” and ten (10) times the diameter for conduits over 2”.

6. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction (i.e. around beams).

D. Conduit Placement:

1. Conduit shall be mechanically continuous from source of current to all outlets. Con duit shall be electrically continuous from source of current to all outlets, unle ss a properly sized grounding conductor is routed within the conduit. All met allic conduits shall be bonded per the National Electrical Code.

2. Route exposed conduit and con duit above suspended ceilings (accessible or not) parallel/perpendicular to the building structural lines, and as close to building structure as possible. Wherever possible, route horizontal conduit runs above water and steam piping.

3. Conduits, raceway, and boxes shall not be installed in concealed locations in metal deck roofing or less than 1.5” below bottom of roof decking.

4. Avoid moisture traps where possible. Where unavoidable, provide a jun ction box with drain fitting at conduit low point.

5. All conduits through walls shall be g routed or sealed into o penings. Where conduit penetrates firewalls and floors, seal with a UL listed sealant. Seal p enetrations with intumescent caulk, putty, or sheet installed per manufacturer's recommendations. All materials used to seal penetrations of firewalls and floors shall be tested and certified as a system per ASTM E814 Standard for fire tests or through-penetration fire stops as manufactured by 3M or approved equal.

6. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL OPENINGS RE QUIRED IN MASONRY OR EXTERIOR WALLS UNDER THIS DIVISION. A QUALIFIED MASON AT THE EXPENSE OF THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL REPAIR ALL OPENINGS TO MATCH EXISTING CONDITIONS.

3.5 CONDUIT TERMINATIONS

A. Where conduit bonding is indicated or required in the contract documents, the bushings shall be a grounding type si zed for the con duit and groun d bonding conductor as manufactured by O-Z/Gedney, Appleton, Thomas & Betts, Burndy, Regal, or approved equal.

B. Conduits with termination fittings shall be threaded for one (1) lock nut on the outside and one (1) lock nut and bushing on the inside of each box.


C. Where conduits terminate in boxes with knockouts, they shall be secured to the boxes with lock nuts and provided with approved screw type tinned iron bushings or fittings with plastic inserts.

D. Where conduits terminate in boxes, fittings, or bodies with threaded openings, they shall be tightly screwed against the shoulder portion of the threaded openings.

E. Conduit terminations to al l motors shal l be ma de with flexible metallic conduit (FMC), unl ess noted otherwise.

F. All conduit ends shall be sealed with plastic immediately after installation to prevent the ent rance of any foreign matter du ring construction. The seals shall be removed and the conduits blown clear of any and all foreign matter prior to any wires or pull cords being installed.

3.6 CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. In the event the location of conduit installation represents conflicting installation requirements as specified in the following schedule, a clarification shall be obtained from the Architect/Engineer. If This Contractor is unable to obtain a clarification as outlined above, concealed rigid galvanized steel conduit installed per these specifications and the National Electrical Code shall be required.

B. The following schedule shall be adhered to unless they constitute a violation of applicable codes or are noted otherwise on the drawings. The installation of RMC conduit will be permitted in place of any and all conduit specified in this schedule.

1. Exposed:

a. Branch Circuits (lighting, receptacles, controls, etc.): EMT.

b. Mechanical Equipment Feeders (pumps, AHU's, chillers, etc.): EMT.

2. Finished Spaces/Concealed: EMT.

3. Wet or Damp Locations: RMC conduit, boxes and fittings, installed and equipped so as to prevent water from entering the conduit system.

4. Interior Locations:

a. Exposed: EMT conduit. b. Concealed: EMT.

5. Hazardous Locations as Defined by the National Electrical Code: RMC conduit complete with screwed fittings and conduit seals.

3.7 BOX INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Galvanized steel boxes may be used in:

1. Concealed interior locations above ceilings and in hollow studded partitions. 2. Exposed interior locations in mechanical rooms and in rooms without ceilings; higher than

8’ above the highest platform level.

B. Cast boxes shall be used in:

1. Exposed interior locations within 8’ of the highest platform level.


3.8 COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS

A. Provide electrical boxes as shown on the drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and code compliance.

B. Electrical box locations shown on the Contract Drawings are approximate, unless dimensioned. Verify location of floor boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough-in.

C. Locate and i nstall boxes to allow a ccess. Avoid interferences with ductwork, piping, st ructure, equipment, etc. Where installation is inaccessible, provide access doors. Coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors with the Architect and General Contractor.

D. Locate and install to maintain headroom and to present a neat appearance.

E. Coordinate locations with Heating Contractor to avoid baseboard radiation cabinets.

3.9 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION

A. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide a minimum horizontal offset of 2 4 inches between boxes installed on opposite sides of stud walls.

1. When the m inimum 24-inch horizontal separation cannot be m aintained in fire-rate d walls, install fire-rated moldable pads to all five sides of the back box to maintain the fire rating of the wall. Install moldable pads in accordance with UL listing for the sp ecific product. Sound insulation pads are not acceptable for use in fire -rated wall applications unless the product carries the necessary fire rating.

2. When the minimum 24-inch horizontal separation cannot be maintained in non-fire-rated walls, install sound insulation pads on all five sides of all back boxes in accordance with the manufacturer’s specification.

B. Install sound insulation pads on all five sid es of the back of all boxes in sound-rated wall assemblies. Sound-rated wall asse mblies are defined as partition types carryin g a So und Transmission Class (STC) rating.

C. The Contractor shall anchor switch and outlet box to wall construction so that it is flush with the finished masonry, paneling, drywall, plaster, etc. The Contractor shall check the boxes as the finish wall surface is bei ng installed to assure that the box i s flush. (Provide plaster rings as necessary.)

D. Mount at hei ghts shown or noted o n the dra wings or as g enerally accepted if not specifically noted.

E. Provide knockout closures for unused openings.

F. Support boxes independently of conduit.

G. Use multiple-gang boxes where more than one device are mounted together; do not use sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems.

H. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation.

I. Coordinate mounting hei ghts and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, backsplashes, and below baseboard radiation.

J. Position outlets to locate luminaires as shown on reflected ceiling drawings.


K. In inaccessible ceiling areas, position outlets and junction boxes within 6 in ches of recessed luminaire, to be accessible through luminaire ceiling opening.

L. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure boxes to interior wall and partition studs, accurately positioned to al low for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall, and adjustable steel channel fasteners for fl ush ceiling outlet boxes.

M. Align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.

3.10 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION

A. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings or in unfinished areas.

B. Support pull and junction boxes independent of conduit.

C. Do not install back-to-back boxes in walls. Pr ovide a minimum horizontal offset of 2 4 inches between boxes installed on opposite sides of stud walls.

1. When the minimum 24-inch horizontal separation cannot be maintained within fire-rated walls, install fire-rated moldable pads to all five sides of the back box to maintain the fire rating of the wall. Install moldable pads in accordance with UL listing for th e specific product. Sound insulation pads are not acceptable for use in fire -rated wall applications unless the product carries the necessary fire rating.

2. When the minimum 24-inch horizontal separation cannot be maintained in non-fire-rated walls, install sound insulation pads on all five sides of the back box in accordance with the manufacturer’s specification.

D. Install sound insulation pads on all five sid es of the back of all boxes in sound-rated wall assemblies. Sound-rated wall asse mblies are defined as partition types carryin g a So und Transmission Class (STC) rating.

3.11 EXPOSED BOX INSTALLATION

A. Boxes shall be secured to the buildi ng structure with proper size screws, bolts, hanger rods, or structural steel elements.

B. On brick, block and concrete walls or ceilings, exposed boxes shall be supported with no less than two (2) Ackerman-Johnson, Paine, Phillips, or approved equal screw anchors or expansion shields and round head machine screws. Cast boxes shall not be drilled.

C. On steel structures, exp osed boxes shall be supported to th e steel mem ber by drilli ng and tapping the member and fastening the boxes by means of round head machine screws.

D. Boxes may be supported on steel members by APPROVED beam clamps if conduit is supported by beam clamps.

E. Boxes shall be fastened to wo od structures by means of a minimum of two (2) wood screws adequately large and long to properly support. (Quantity depends on size of box.)

F. Wood, plastic, or fiber plugs shall not be used for fastenings.

G. Explosive devices shall not be used unless specifically allowed.

END OF SECTION

MORTON COLLEGE WIRE AND CABLE Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Building wire B. Fire-rated cable

1.2 REFERENCES

A. NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2,000V or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy

B. UL 44 – Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables

C. UL 83 – Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

D. UL 1581 – Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BUILDING WIRE

A. Feeders and Branch Circuits Larger Than 6 AWG: Coppe r, stranded conductor, 600 volt insulation, THHN/THWN.

B. Feeders and Branch Circuits Larger Than 6AWG in Underground Conduit: Cop per, stranded conductor, 600 volt insulation, THWN.

C. Feeders and Branch Circuits 6 A WG and Smal ler: Co pper conductor, 600 volt insul ation, THHN/THWN. 6 and 8 AWG, stranded conductor; smaller than 8 A WG, solid o r stranded conductor, unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

D. Control Circuits: Copper, stranded conductor 600 volt insulation, THHN/THWN.

E. Aluminum conductors are not to be used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Building wire in raceway.

3.2 CONTRACTOR CHANGES

A. The basis of design is copper conductors installed in raceway based on ambient temperature of 30°C, NEC Table 310.16.

B. The Contractor shall be re sponsible for derating and sizing conductors and conduits to equal or exceed the ampacity of the ba sis of design circuits, if he/sh e chooses to use metho ds or materials other than the basis of design.


C. Underground electrical duct ampacity rating shall be in accordance with NEC Table B.310.7 or calculated in accordance with Annex B Application information for Ampacity Calculation.

D. Record drawing shall include the calculations and sketches.

3.3 GENERAL WIRING METHODS

A. Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than 14 AWG for control wiring.

B. Use 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 75 feet, and for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 200 feet.

C. The ampacity of multiple conductors in one conduit shall be derated per National Electrical Code, Article 310. In no case shall more than 4 conductors be installed in one conduit to such loads as motors larger than 1/4 HP, panelboards, etc.

D. Where installing parallel feeders, place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway or cable.

E. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes.

F. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.

G. Make conductor lengths for parallel circuits equal.

H. All conductors shall be continuous in conduit from last outlet to their termination.

I. Terminate all spare conductors on terminal blocks, and label the spare conductors.

3.4 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS

A. Splice and tap only in accessible junction boxes.

B. Use solderless, tin-plated copper, compression terminals (lugs) applied with circumferential crimp for copper conductor terminations, 8 AWG and larger.

C. Use solderless, tin-plated, compression terminals (lugs) applied with indenter crimp for copper conductor terminations, 10 AWG and smaller.

D. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper wire splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. For 10 AWG and smaller, use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps.

E. Use copper, compression connectors applied with circumferential crimp fo r copper wire splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of the insulation value of conductor.

F. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.

G. Make splices, taps and termin ations to carry full ampacity of conductors without percep tible temperature rise.

H. Phase Sequence: All apparatu s shall be co nnected to operate in the pha se sequence A-B-C representing the time sequence in which the pha se conductors so identifie d reach positive maximum voltage.


I. As a general rule, applicable to switches, circuit breakers, starters, panelboards, and the like, the connections to phase conductors are intended thus:

1. Facing the front and operating side of the equipment, the phase identification shall be:

a. Left to Right - A-B-C b. Top to Bottom - A-B-C

J. Connection revisions as required to achieve correct rotation of motors shall be made at the load terminals of the starters or disconnect switches.


A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Division 1.

B. Building Wire and Power Cable Testing: Test shall be made by means of an insulation testing device such as a “Megger” using not less than 500 volts D.C. test potential.

C. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.

D. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer's recommended values.

E. Perform continuity test on all powe r and equipment branch ci rcuit conductors. Verify proper phasing connections.

END OF SECTION

MORTON COLLEGE WIRING DEVICES Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 2

SECTION 16141 WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Wall switches B. Receptacles including GFCI C. Device plates and box covers

1.2 REFERENCES

A. DSCC W-C-896F – General Specification for Electrical Power Connector

B. FS W-C-596 - Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle, and Cable Outlet

C. FS W-S-896 - Switch, Toggle

D. NEMA WD 1 – General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices

E. NEMA WD 6 – Wiring Devices – Dimensional Requirements

F. UL 498 – Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles

G. UL 943 – Standard for Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters

H. UL 1472 – Solid-State Dimming Controls


A. Provide similar devices from a single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency to Authorities Having Jurisdiction and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WALL SWITCHES

A. Refer to General Electrical Equipment Schedule for configuration and ratings.

2.2 RECEPTACLES

A. Refer to General Electrical Equipment Schedule for configuration and ratings.

B. Back wired devices shall be complete with eight holes that are screw activated with metal clamps for connection to #12 or #10 copper conductors.

C. Side wired devices shall have four binding screws that are undercut for positive wire retention.

D. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) receptacles shall comply with the 2006 edition of U.L. 943 requiring increased surge immunity, improved corrosion resistance, improved resistance to false

MORTON COLLEGE WIRING DEVICES Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 2 of 2

tripping and diagnostic indication for miswiring if the line and load conductors are reversed during installation.

2.3 WALL PLATES

A. Plate securing screws shall be metal with head color matching the wall plate finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install light swit ches, dimmers, and convenience receptacles at elevatio ns indicated in the General Installation Notes on the contract drawings.

B. Install receptacles vertically with ground slot up or where indicated on the drawings, horizontally with ground slot to the left.

C. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas, using jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.

D. Install devices and wall plates flush and level.

E. Contractor to verify that wall dimmer ratings are achieved where a ganged installation is used.

F. Install nameplate identification to re ceptacle cover plates indicated. Identificat ion shall id entify panel name and circuit number. Refer to Specification Section 16195 - Electrical Identification.

G. Test receptacles and modular wiring connectors for proper polarity, ground continuity and compliance with requirements.

END OF SECTION

MORTON COLLEGE ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Nameplates and tape labels B. Conductor color coding C. Electrical gear labeling D. Power distribution equipment labeling

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI C2 – National Electrical Safety Code

B. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code

C. ANSI A13.1 – Standard for Pipe Identification

D. ANSI Z535.4 – Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for b anding Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 inch to 2 inches in width.

B. Pretensioned Flexible Wraparoun d Colored Plastic Sleeves for Cable Id entification: flexible acrylic bands sized to suit the ca ble diameter and arranged to stay in pla ce by pre -tensioned gripping action when coiled around the cable.

C. Wire/Cable Designation Tape M arkers: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound, cable/conductor markers with preprinted numbers and letter.

D. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking nylon ca ble ties, 0.18 -inch minimum width, 50-lb minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature range from minus 50°F to 350°F. Provide ties in specified colors when used for color coding.

E. Aluminum, Wraparound Marker Bands: 1" in width, .014 inch thick aluminum bands with stamped or embossed legend, and fitted with slots or ears for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors.

F. Brass or aluminum Tags: 2" by 2" by .05-inch metal tags with stamped legend, punched for fastener.

2.2 NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS

A. Engraved, Plastic-Laminated Labels, Signs and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, 1/16-inch minimum thick for signs up to 20 square inches, or 8 inches in length; 1/8 inch thi ck for la rger sizes. Labels shall be punched for me chanical fasteners. Engraving legend shall be as follows:

1. Black letters on white face for normal power.


B. Baked–Enamel Signs for interi or Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched, or drilled for fasteners, with colors, le gend, and size required for application. Mounting ¼" grommets in corners.

C. Exterior, Metal-Backed, Butyrate Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with .0396 inch galvanized-steel backing: and with colors, legend, and size required for application. Mounting ¼" grommets in corners.

D. Safety Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145.

E. Fasteners for Plastic-Laminated Signs; Self-tapping stainless steel sc rews or number 10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used in electrical identification work with corresponding designations specified or i ndicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as required by code.

B. Install identification devices in accorda nce with manufacturer’s written instruction and requirements of NEC.

C. Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that requ ire finish, install identification after compl etion of finish work . All mounting surfaces shall be clea ned and degreased prior to identification installation.

D. Identify Junction, Pull and Connection Boxes: Labeling shall be 3/8-inch Kroy tape or Brother self-laminating vinyl label, color-coded same as conduits or permanent magic marker (color coded), neatly hand printed. In rooms that are painted out, provide labeling on inside of cover.

E. Circuit Identification: Tag or label conductors as follows:

1. Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in Same Enclosure: Where multiple branch circuits are terminated or spliced in a box or enclosure, label each conductor with source and circuit number.

2. Multiple Control Wiring and Communication/Signal Circuits in Same Enclosure: Fo r control and communications/signal wiring, use wire/cable marking tape at terminations in wiring boxes, troughs, and control cabinets. Use consistent letter/number conductor designations throughout on wire/cable marking tape.

3. Match identification markings with designations used in p anelboards shop drawings, Contract Documents, and similar previously established identification schemes for the facility’s electrical installations.

F. Apply warning, caution and instruction signs as follows:

1. Install warning, caution or instruction signs where required by NEC, where indicated, or where reasonably required to assu re safe op eration and maintenance of electrical systems and of the items to which they connect. In stall engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.


2. Emergency Operating Signs: Install, where required by NEC, where indicated, or where reasonably required to assure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of the items to which they connect, engraved laminate signs with white le gend on red background with minimum 3/8-inch high lettering f or emergency instructions on powe r transfer, load shedding, or other emergency operations.

G. Apply circuit/control/item designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for pushbuttons, pilot lights, alarm/signal components, and similar items, except where labeling is specified elsewhere.

H. Install labels parallel to equipment lines at lo cations as required and at locatio ns for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

3.2 RECEPTACLE COVER PLATES

A. Provide identification on all receptacle cover plates indicated. Identification shall indicate source and circuit number serving the device (i.e. “C1A #24”).

B. Identification material to be a clear, 3/8-inch Kroy tape or Brother self-laminating vinyl label with black letters in normal size “Swiss 721 Bold” font. Letter an d number size to 3/16-i nch high. Embossed Dymo-Tape labels are not accepta ble. Permanently affix identification lab el to cover plates, centered above the receptacle openings.

3.3 BOX LABELING

A. All junction, pull, and connection boxes shall be identified as follows:

1. For power and lighting circuits, indicate system voltage and identity of contained circuits (“120V, 1LA1-3,5,7”).

2. For other wiring, indicate system type and description of wiring (“FIRE ALARM NAC #1”).

B. Box covers shall be painted to correspond with system type as follows:

1. Fire Alarm: Red 2. Temperature Control/Building Automation: Blue

3.4 CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING

A. Color coding shall be applied at all panels, switches, junction boxes, pull boxes, vaults, manholes etc., where the wires and cables are visible and terminations are made. The same color coding shall be used throughout the entire electrical system, therefore maintainin g proper phasing throughout the entire project.

B. All wires and cables, 6 AWG or larger, used in motor circuits, main feeders, sub-main feeders and branch circuits, shall be coded by the application of plastic tape. The tape shall be 3-M, Plymouth or Permacel, in colors specified below. The tape shall be applied at each conductor termination with two 1-inch tape bands at 6-inch centers. Contractor option to use colore d cabling in lieu of the tape at each end for conductor 6 AWG to 500 KCM.

C. Wire and cables smaller than 6 AWG shall be color coded by the manufacturer.

D. Colored cable ties shall be applied in groups of three ties of specified color to each conductor at each terminal or splice p oint starting 3 inches from the termin ation and spaced at 3- i nches centers. Tighten to a snug fit, and cut off excess length.


E. Where more than one nominal voltage system exists in a building or facility, each ungrounded conductor of a multi-wire branch circuit, where accessible, shall be identified by phase and system.

F. Conductors shall be color coded as follows:

1. 208Y/120 Volt, 4-Wire:

a. A-Phase – Black b. B-Phase – Red c. C-Phase – Blue d. Neutral – White e. Ground Bond – Green

2. 480Y/277 Volt, 4-Wire:

a. A-Phase – Brown b. B-Phase – Orange c. C-Phase – Yellow d. Neutral – Gray e. Ground Bond – Green

END OF SECTION

MORTON COLLEGE LIGHTING Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 16510 LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Interior luminaires and accessories B. Lamps C. Ballasts

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI C78.377-2008 – Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products

B. ANSI C82.11 - High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts

C. ANSI C82.77-2002 – Standard for Harmonic Emission Limits and Rel ated Power Quality Requirements for Lighting Equipment

D. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code

E. UL 935 – Standard for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 16010.

B. Submit product data sheets for luminaires, lamps, ballasts, drivers and poles. Include complete product model number with all options as specified. Submittal shall be arranged with fixtures listed in a scending order, and with e ach luminaire’s associated lamp, balla st, driver, or pole information following luminaire’s product data. Fail ure to o rganize submittal in this m anner will result in the submittal being rejected.

C. Submit lens product data, dimensions and weights if not included in product data sheet submittal.

D. Include outline drawings, support points, weights, and accessory information for each luminaire type.

E. Submit utility rebate forms, where offered at project location, with rebate items completed.

F. LED luminaire submittals shall include photometric report per IESNA LM-79-08 for the latest generation system being furnished, including independent testing labo ratory name, report number, date, luminaire model number, input wattage, luminaire, and light source specifications. Manufacturer origin of LED chipset and driver shall be submitted.

G. For all LE D luminaires specified as dimmer controlled, submit dimmer de vice data th at is approved by manufacturer of submitted luminaire and that Contractor proposes to fu rnish and install. Contractor is responsible for verifying that installed dimming controls are compatible with and approved by the luminaire manufacturer.


A. Deliver products to site. Store and protect under provisions of Section 16010.


B. Protect luminaire finishes, lenses, and trims from damage during storage and installation. Do not remove protective films until construction cleanup within each area is complete.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Fluorescent ballasts shall carry a three-year warranty from date of Substantial Completion. HID ballasts shall carry a two-year warranty from date of Substantial Completion. Dimming electronic ballasts shall have a five year warranty.

B. Emergency fluorescent ballast shall have a three-year warranty from date of substantial completion.

C. Fluorescent lamps shall carry a two-year warranty from date of Substantial Completion.

D. Light emitting diode (LED) light engines and drivers shall have a fi ve-year warranty from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES - GENERAL

A. Recessed Ceiling Luminaires: Confirm ceiling type and furnish trim and accessories necessary to permit proper install ation in each cei ling system. Where fire-rat ed ceiling assemblies are specified, furnish and install listed enclosures around luminaires that maintain the system rating.

B. Suspended Luminaires: Coordinate power feed and suspension canopies with ceiling type and architectural RCP for proper fit and location. Ensure finished installations are plumb and level at elevations specified.

2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS – LAMPS

MANUFACTURER FLUORESCENT Philips Lighting Company X

Osram Sylvania X USHIO America, Inc. X

A. Lamps used with dimming shall be veri fied for compatibility with dimmer manufacturer prior to ordering.

2.3 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. T-8 Type: Correlated color temperature (CCT) and Color Rendering Index (CRI) as scheduled on the drawings. Lamps shall be reduced mercury type having credentials that pass the EPA 1990 Toxic Characteristics. Four-foot, 32-watt lamps shall be 3100 lumen extended performance type, with minimum 30,000-hour lamp life at three-hour starts.

2.4 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS - GENERAL

A. All ballasts shall have a Class A sound rating, or better.

B. Ballast shall comply with EMI and RFI limits set by FCC (CFR 47 Part 18).

C. Linear fluorescent ballasts shall operate parallel circuit lamps that allow remainin g lamps to maintain full output if companion lamps fail.


D. All fluorescent ballasts designed for operation of double-ended lamps or integral to a luminaire supplied by multi-wire branch circuits shall comply with disconnecting means as specified in NEC Article 410 and amendments thereto.

2.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FLUORESCENT ELECTRONIC BALLASTS

MANUFACTURER PRS

A. Advance IOP

C. MagnaTek/Universal AccuStart Ultim8

D. Osram/Sylvania QuickTronic

2.6 FLUORESCENT ELECTRONIC BALLAST

A. Fluorescent Ballast: Shal l meet UL Standard 935. Ballasts shall be PROGRAM RAPID START (PRS) type.

B. Ballasts operated by occupancy sensors shall be program rapid start type.

C. Ballasts shall meet applicable ANSI and IEEE standards regarding harmonic distortion and surge protection. The input current 3rd h armonic content shall not exceed 13% of the input current. The total harmonic distortion shall not exceed 10%.

D. Fluorescent ballasts shall conform to the performance criteria listed below:

1. Ballast factor as indicated on luminaire schedule.

2. Mean System Efficacy:

a. Program Start: > 88 MLPW(T8)

E. Luminaires designed as multi-level switching shall have combination of 1, 2 or 3 lamp b allasts configured to allow switching of all inboard lamps as a group separate from outboard lamps in the room. Master/slave luminaire arrangement is preferred where practical. The Contractor shall verify ballast configuration to achieve switching shown.

F. The ballast must maintain constant high output through input voltage ranges of 90 to 145 volts for a 120V ballast (+/- 25%) and 200 to 320 volt for a 277V ballast (+/- 28%).

G. Ballast Requirements:

1. Current crest factor shall be no greater than 1.8 for F40 lamps and 1.7 for all other lamps.

2. The operating ambient temperature range shall be 50°F to 105°F.

3. Fluorescent ballasts shall operate at 20KHZ or higher, with no detectable lamp flicker.

4. Ballasts shall not be affected by lamp failure and shall yield normal lamp life.

5. Ballast power factor shall be greater than 90%.


6. Ballast shall be rated Class P and shall be thermally protected.

7. Program rapid start ballasts shall heat the filament prior to applying the starting voltage to the lamp, then remove la mp cathode heat in a sequence consistent with ANSI standard C82.11.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Securely fasten luminaires to the ceilin g framing member by mechanical means such as bolts, screws, rivets or listed clips identified for use with the type of ceiling framing members.

B. Install lamps in lamp holders of luminaires.

C. Support surface-mounted luminaires directly from building structure. Install luminaires larger than eight square feet (8 ft2) or weighing more than 30 pounds independent of ceiling framing.

D. Support suspended or pendant mounted luminaires independent of ceiling grid with a minimum of two #12 gauge wires. Susp ension assembly and anchors shall be ca pable of supporting 300 pounds dead load at each suspension point.

E. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. Use plaster frames or install grid clips. Support luminaires independent of ceiling grid with a minimum of two (2) #12 gauge wires located on diagonal corners.

F. Adjust aimable luminaires to obtain li ghting levels on objects and areas as directed to obtain desired lighting levels.

G. Fire-rated Ceilings: Support luminaires independent of ceiling system with a minimum of two (2) #12 gauge wires.

3.2 LAMP SEASONING

A. Operate all fluorescent lamps for 100 hours prior to requesting final observation. Operate lamps for minimum 8 hour intervals during seasoning.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Align luminaires and clean lenses and diffusers at completion of work. Clean paint splatters, dirt, and debris from installed luminaires.

END OF SECTION

MORTON COLLEGE LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 16570 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Line and low voltage, occupancy sensors, and related power supplies.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code B. FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 15, Subpart J - Radio Frequency Interference C. UL Standard 916 Energy Management Equipment

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 16010.

B. Submit product data showing dimensions and ratings for relays, power supplies, control stations, sensors, and accessory modules.

C. Submit typical wiring diagrams for all components including, but not limited to relays, low voltage switches, occupancy sensors, and control stations.

D. Submit manufacturer sensor coverage patterns applicable to this proje ct. For area s requiring multiple sensor devices for appropriate coverage, submit specific manufacturer approved sensor layout as an overlay directly on the project drawings, either in print or approved electronic form.

1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit project record documents under provisions of Section 16010.

B. Accurately record location of switches, power supplies, and control en closures. Include description of switching and circuiting arrangements.


A. Submit emergency, operation, and m aintenance data under provisions of Se ction 16010. Data shall also include the following:

1. Schedule for routine m aintenance, inspection, and calibration of all lighting co ntrol devices and system components.

2. Replacement part numbers for all system components.

1.6 EXTRA STOCK

A. Occupancy Sensors and Power Supply/Relay: Five (5) percent of quantity installed. Minimum of two (2) of each configuration and type.


A. Manufacturers shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of l ighting control equipment and ancillary equipment, of types an d capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.


B. All components and assemblies are to be factory pre-tested prior to delivery and installation.

C. Comply with NEC as applicable to electrical wiring work.

D. Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to types of electrical equipment and enclosures.

E. Panels and accessory devices are to be UL listed under UL 916 Energy Management Equipment. Panels and accessories used for control of life safety and critical branch circuits shall be listed under UL 924 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment.

F. All assemblies are to be in complian ce with FCC emissi ons standards specified in Part 15 Subpart J for Class A applications.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall warrant products under normal use and service to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from date of commissioning.

B. Occupancy, vacancy, daylight sensors and controls shall have a five (5) year warranty from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INDOOR OCCUPANCY

A. General Description: Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate power supply/relay unit.

1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied, with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.

3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20 A ballast load at 120 and 277 VAC, fo r 13 amp tungsten at 120 VAC, and for 1 hp at 120 VAC. Power supply to sensor shall be 24 V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.

4. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.

b. Relay: Externally mou nted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure. Mount relay above ceiling near entry door to room or area.

c. Time Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed.

5. Indicator: LED to show when motio n is being d etected during testing an d normal operation of the sensor.

6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.

B. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mo unted. Detect occupancy by using a combination of PIR and ultrasonic or acou stic detection methods in ar ea of covera ge. Particu lar technology or


combination of technologies that controls on and off functions shall be selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.

2. Detection Coverage:

a. Task Areas: Detect occupancy anywhere in an area based on hand motion.

b. Circulation Areas: Detect occupancy anywhere in an area based upon half-step walking motion.

C. Mask sensors where necessary to prevent nuisance switching from adjacent areas.

2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Control Wiring:

1. Where installed with the line-voltage wiring, control wiring shall be copper conductors not smaller than No. 16 AWG with insulation voltage rating and temperature rating equal to that of the li ne-voltage wiring, complying with Division 16 Section 16120 "Wire and Cable."

2. Tap conductors to switches or relays: Stranded copper conductors of 16 AWG or solid 16 or 18 AWG with insulation rating equal to that of the line-voltage wiring.

B. Splices and Taps:

1. Tapping or wire trap connectors shall be used to splice all Class 1 and Class 2 control wiring. Twist-on, wire-nut type connectors are not allowed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.

B. Verify field d imensions and coordinate physical size of all equipment with the archite ctural requirements of the spaces into which they are to be installe d. Allow spa ce for ad equate ventilation and circulation of air.

C. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.

D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings.

B. All wiring shall be installed in conduit.

C. All branch lo ad circuits shall be live tested b efore connecting the loads to the lighting control panel.


3.3 SUPPORT SERVICES

A. System Startup:

1. Manufacturer shall provide factory authorized technician to confirm proper installation and operation of all system components.

B. Testing:

1. System shall be completely functional tested by a factory-authorized technician. All loads shall be tested live for continuity and freedom from defects, and all control wiring shall be tested for continuity and connections prior to energizing the system components.

2. Programming of lighting l evels and sensor settings shall be performed by a factory-authorized technician. The following procedures shall be performed at a minimum:

a. Confirm occupancy sensor placement, sensitivity, and time del ay settings t o meet specified performance criteria.

C. Training:

1. Training duration shall be no less than one (1) hour.

END OF SECTION

MORTON COLLEGE FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Fire alarm and detection systems

1.2 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code

B. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code

C. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code


A. System: UL or FM Global listed.

B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101.

C. Conform to requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

D. Conform to UL 864 Fire Alarm and UL 1076 Security.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Statement: This specification section and th e accompanying fire alarm specific design documents describe the mini mum material quality, req uired features, and op erational requirements of the system. These documents do not convey every wire that must be installed and every equipment connection that must be made. Based on the equipment described and the performance required of the system, a s presented in these documents, the Vendor and the Contractor are solely re sponsible for d etermining all wiring, p rogramming and miscellaneous equipment required for a complete and operational system.

B. This section of the specific ations includes the furnishi ng, installation and connection of the microprocessor controlled, intelligent reporting, fire alarm equipment required to form a complete coordinated system that is ready for operation. It shall include, but is not limited to, a larm initiating devices, and wiring as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

C. Interfacing the existing fire ala rm system: Provide all items, components, devices, hardware, software, programming, expansion components, conduit, wiring etc. needed to interface with the existing fire alarm system. This includes but is not limited to addi tional power supplies, initiating devices and circuits, signaling devices and circuits, monitoring devices and circuits. The existing fire alarm sy stem shall b e interfaced such that the existing fire alarm system's functionality, integrity and annunciation shall be equivalent to pre-construction conditions unless noted otherwise. The functionality and integ rity shall be maintained during construction. The entire system shall be a ble to be completely reset from any si ngle reset location point. The entire system shall be annunciated at any annunciation location.

D. Fire Alarm System: NFPA 72; Autom atic and manual fire al arm system, non-coded, analog-addressable with automatic sensitivity control of certai n detectors, multiplexed signal transmission.



A. Manufacturer: Refer to general electrical equipment on drawings.

B. Installer: A factory-authorized licensed electrical or security contractor with five years experience in the design, installation and maintenance of fire alarm systems by that manufacturer.

C. Qualifications: The pe rson managing/overseeing the p reparation of shop drawings and the system installation/programming/testing shall be trained and certified by the system manufacturer and shall be Fire Alarm Certified by NICET, minimum Level 2. This person’ s name and certification number shall appear on the start-up and testing reports.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 16010 and as noted below.

1. Failure to comply with all of the following and all of the provisions in 16010 will result in the shop drawing submittal being rejected without review.

2. Failure to submit the fire alarm without all requirements fulfilled in a single comprehensive submittal will be grounds to require a complete resubmittal.

B. Provide product catalog data sheets as shop drawings.

1. Provide a product catalog data sheet for ea ch item shown on the Gen eral Electrical Equipment Schedule and for each piece of equipment that is not shown on the drawings, but required for the operation of the system.

2. Where a pa rticular General Electrical Equipment Schedule item has on e or more variations (such as those denoted by subscripts, etc) a separate additional product catalog data sheet shall be provided for each variation that requires a different part number to be ordered. The corresponding General Electrical Equipment Schedule symbol shall be shown on the top of each sheet.

3. Where multiple items a nd options are shown on o ne data sheet, the part n umber and options of the item to be used shall be clearly denoted.

C. Submit CAD floor plans as shop drawings:

1. The complete layout of the entire sy stem, device addresse s, auxiliary equipment, and manufacturer’s wiring requirements shall be shown.

2. A legend or key shall be provided to show which symbols shown on the submittal floor plans correspond with symbols shown on the Contract Documents.

D. With regard to all fire alarm circuits, provide the following: manufacturer’s wiring requirements (manufacturer, type, size, etc.) and voltage drop calculations.

E. Provide installation and maintenance manuals under provisions of Section 16010.

F. Submit manufacturer's certificate that system meets or exceeds specified requirements.

G. Provide information on the system batteries as follows: total battery capacity, total capacity used by all devices on this project, total available future capacity.

H. Submit photocopy proof of NI CET certification of the person overseeing the prepa ration of drawings and installation/testing.


I. When required to comply with local or state regulatory reviews, the fire alarm submittal shall have a Professional Engineer’s stamp and signature of the state in which the project is completed. NOTE: The Archite ct/Engineer cannot stamp and seal submittal drawings not prepared under their supervision.

1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit documents under the provisions of Section 16010.

B. Include location of end-of-line devices.

C. Provide a CAD drawing of each area of the bu ilding (minimum scale of 1/1 6” = 1’-0”) showing each device on the project and its address. The devices shall be shown in their installed location and shall be labeled with the same nomenclature as is used in the fire alarm panel programming.


A. Submit data under provisions of Section 16010 .

B. Include operating instructions, and maintenance and repair procedures.

C. Include results of testing of all devices and functions.

D. Include manufacturer’s representative's letter stating that system is operational.

E. Include the CAD floor plan drawings.

F. Include shop drawings as reviewed by the Architect/Engineer and the local Authority Having Jurisdiction.


A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 16010 .

B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 16010 .

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Provide one (1) year warranty on all materials and labor from Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT DEVICES

A. Smoke Detectors:

1. Refer to General Electrical Equipment Schedule for specific device requirements.

2. Analog Photoelectric Type Sensor: Sha ll use th e photoelectric principle to mea sure smoke density and send data to the control panel representing the analog level of smoke density measured.

3. Each smoke detector shall connect directly to an SLC loop.

4. Each detector shall be mounted, where shown on the drawings, on a twist-lock base with all mounting hardware provided. Provide a two-piece head/base design.


5. Each detector shall have a manual switching means to set the internal ide ntifying code (address) of that detector, which the control panel shall use to identify its address with the type of sensor connected.

6. Dual alarm and power indicators shall be provided that flash under normal conditions and remain continuous under alarm or trouble conditions. Remote indicator terminals shall be provided.

7. A test means shall be provided to simulate an alarm condition.

8. Where operation is n oted as required below 32ºF and/or above 120ºF, a conventional device shall be installed with a unique monitor module located in the nearest available location with maintained temperatures between 32ºF and 120ºF.

2.2 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE DEVICES

A. Visual Alarm Devices:

1. High intensity (candela rating as scheduled on the drawings) xenon strobe or equivalent under a lens. Candela rating shall be visible from exterior of the device.

2. The maximum pulse duration shall be 0.2 seconds with a maximum duty cycle of 40%. The flash rate shall be 1 Hz. Where more than two st robes are visible from any one location, the fire alarm visual devices shall be synchronized.

3. Device, housing, and backbox shall be UL listed for fire alarm/emergency applications.

B. Audio (Horn) Alarm Devices:

1. Sound Rating: 85 dB at 10 feet. Sound levels fo r alarm signals shall not exceed 120 dBA in the occupied area.

2. Device shall be capable of a high and l ow dB level setting. Unless noted oth erwise, the device shall be set to the high setting at building completion.

3. Device, housing, and backbox shall be UL listed for fire alarm/emergency applications.

2.3 WIRING

A. Fire alarm wiring/cabling shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and pursuant to Nation al Fire Codes. Ca bling shall b e UL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760 for po wer-limited fire alarm signal service.

B. Approved manufacturers of fire alarm cable:

1. Comtran Corp. 2. Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc. 3. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corp. 4. West Penn Wire/CDT.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SEQUENCES OF FIRE ALARM OPERATION

A. General:

1. Fire alarm system shall match pre-existing conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and referenced codes.

B. Devices:

1. General:

a. All ceiling-mounted devices shall be located where shown on the reflected ceiling and floor plans. If not sh own on the reflected ceiling or reflected floor drawings, the devices shall be installed in the relative locations shown on the floor drawings in a neat and uniform pattern.

b. All devices shall be coordinated with luminaires, diffusers, sprinkler heads, piping and other obstructions to maintain a neat and operable installation. Mo unting locations and spacing shall not exceed the requirements of NFPA 72.

c. Where the devices are to be installed in a grid type ceiling system, the detectors shall be centered in the ceiling tile.

d. The location of all fire alarm devices shall be coordinated with other devices mounted in the proximity. Whe re a conflict arises with oth er items or with architectural elements that will not allow the device to be mounted at the location or height shown, the Contractor shall adjust location of device so that ne w location meets all requirements in NFPA 72 and all applicable building codes.

2. Per the requirements of NFPA, detector head s shall not be instal led until after the fina l construction cleaning unless required by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). If detector heads must be installed prior to final cleaning (for partial occupancy, to monitor finished areas or as otherwise required by the AHJ), they shall not be installed until after the fire alarm panel is inst alled, with wires terminated, ready for o peration. Any detector head installed prior to the final construction cleaning shall be removed and cleaned prior to closeout.

3. Notification Appliance Devices:

a. Devices shall be located where shown on the drawings.

b. Wall-mounted audio, visual and audio/visual alarm devices shall be mounted as denoted on the drawings.

C. Wiring:

1. Fire alarm wiring/cabling shall be p rovided by the Contracto r in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and pursuant to National Fire Codes.

2. Wiring shall be installed in red conduit.


3. All junction boxes shall be painted red with SLC and NAC circuits identified on cover.

4. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits: Building wiring as specified in Section 16120.

5. No wiring other than that directly associated with fire alarm detection, alarm or auxiliary fire protection functions shall be in fire alarm conduits. Wiring splices shall be avoided to the extent possible, and if needed, they shall be made only i n junction boxes, and enclosed by plastic wire nut type connectors. Transposing or changing color coding of wires shall not be pe rmitted. All con ductors in conduit containing more than one wire shall be labeled on each end, in all junction boxes, and at each device with “E-Z Markers” or equivalent. Conductors in cabinets shall be carefully formed and harnessed so that each drops off directly opposite to its terminal. Cabinet terminals shall be numbered and coded, and no unterminated conductors are permitted in cabinets or control panels. All controls, function switches, etc. shall be clearly labeled on all equipment panels.

D. Devices surface mounted in finished areas shall be mounted on surface backboxes furnished by fire alarm equipment supplier. Backboxes shall be painted to match device, shall be the same shape and size as the device shall not have visible knockouts.


A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 16010.

B. Test in accordance with NFPA 72, Chapter 14 and local fire d epartment requirements. Submit documentation with O & M manuals in accordance with Section 14.6 of the Code.

3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Provide manufacturer's field services under provisions of Section 16010.

B. Include services of certified te chnician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections, and system testing.

C. Note that room numbers depicted on the architectural/engineering drawings will not necessarily reflect the actual room (signage) numbers that the Owner selects. The Contractor and fire alarm manufacturer shall coordinate the a ctual room numbers as the Owner directs to ide ntify each device. This list shall be a part of the floor plan record drawing to be turn ed in at the pro ject closeout.

END OF SECTION

MORTON COLLEGE BASIC COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 19

SECTION 17010 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Basic Communications Systems Requirements specifically applicable to Division 17 sections, in addition to Division 1 - General Requirements.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Specification and the accompanying drawings govern the work involved in furnishing, installing, testing and placing into satisfactory operation the Communications Systems as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

B. Each Contractor shall provide all new materials as indicated in the schedules on the drawings, and/or in these specifications, and all items required to make their portion of the Communications Systems a finished and working system.

C. Description of Systems include but are not limited to the following:

1. Complete Structured Cabling System including, but not limited to:

a. Voice and data horizontal cabling and terminations. b. Information outlets (IO’s) including faceplates, jacks and labeling. c. Telecommunication Room equipment including patch panels, and termination

blocks. d. Cabling pathways. e. Testing

2. Low Voltage Communications Wiring (less than +120VAC) as specified and required for proper system control and communications.

3. All associated electrical backboxes, conduit, miscellaneous cabling, and power supplies required for proper system installation and operation as defined in the “Suggested Matrix of Scope Responsibility”.

4. Firestopping of penetrations as described in Section 17080.

1.3 WORK SEQUENCE

A. All construction work that will produce excessive noise level s and interference with normal building operations, as determined by the Owner, shall be scheduled with the Owner. It may be necessary to schedule such work during non-occupied hours. The Owner shall reserve the right to set policy as to when restricted construction hours will be required.

1.4 DIVISION OF WORK BETWEEN ELECTRICAL AND COMMUNICATIONS CONTRACTORS

A. Division of work is the responsibility of the Prime Contractor. Any scope of work described in the contract document shall be sufficient for inclu ding said requirement in the proje ct. The Prime Contractor shall be sol ely responsible for det ermining the ap propriate subcontractor for the described scope. In n o case shall the project be assessed an additional cost for scope that is described in the contract documents. The following division of responsibility is a guideline based on typical industry practice.


B. Definitions:

1. "Electrical Contractor" as referred to herein refers to the Contractors listed in Division 16 of this Specification.

2. “Electrical Contractor” shall also refe r to the Contractor listed in Division 17 of this specification when the “S uggested Matrix of Scope Responsibility” indicates the work shall be provided by the EC. Refer to the Contract Documents for the “Suggested Matrix of Scope Responsibility”.

3. “Communications Contractor” as referred to herein refers to th e Contractors listed in Division 17 of this Specification.

4. Low Voltage Communications Wiring: The wiring (less than 120VAC) associated with the Communications Systems, used for analog and/or digital signals between equipment.

5. Telecommunications Rough-in: Relates specifically to the backboxes, necessary plaster rings and other miscellaneous hardware required for the installation and mounting of the telecommunications information outlet. Rough-i n shall in clude conduit from the information outlet backbox to above the la y-in ceiling. Wh ere surface mounted backboxes are required, conduit shall be routed to above the lay-in ceiling.

C. General:

1. The purpose of these Specifications is to outline typical Ele ctrical and Communications Contractor's work responsibilities as related to Communi cations Systems including Telecommunications rough-in, conduit, power wiring and Low Voltage Communications Wiring. The prime contractor is responsible for all divisions of work.

2. The exact wiring requirements for much of the equipment cannot be determined until the systems have been purchased and submittals are approved. Therefore, only known wiring, conduits, raceways, and electrical power as related to such items, is shown on the Communications Drawings. Other wi ring, conduits, raceways, junction bo xes, and electrical power not shown on the Communications Drawings but required for the successful operation of t he systems shall be the responsibility of the Communications Contractor and included in the Contractor’s bid.

3. Where the Electrical Contractor is required to install conduit, conduit sleeves and/or power connections in support of Communications systems, the final installation shall not begin until a coordination meeting between the Electrical Contractor and the Communications Contractor has convened to d etermine the exact locat ion and requirements of the installation.

4. Where the Electri cal Contractor is requir ed to install cable tray that will contain Low Voltage Communications Wiring, the installation shall not begin until the Communications Contractor has completed a coordination review of the cable tray shop drawing.

5. This Contractor shall esta blish Electrical and Com munications utility elevations prior to fabrication and installation. The Com munications Contractor shall cooperate with the Electrical Contractor and the determined elevations in accordan ce with th e guidelines below. T his Contractor shall coordinate utility elevations with other trades. When a conflict arises, priority shall be as follows:

a. Lighting Fixtures b. Gravity Flow Piping, including Steam and Condensate c. Sheet Metal


d. Electrical Busduct e. Sprinkler Piping and other Piping f. Conduit and Wireway g. Open Cabling

D. Electrical Contractor's Responsibility:

1. Assumes all responsibility for all required conduit and power connections when shown on the “Suggested Matrix of Scope Responsibility” to be pr ovided by the Electrical Contractor.

2. Responsible for Communications Systems grounding and bonding.


E. Communications Contractor’s Responsibility:

1. Assumes all responsibility for the Low Voltage Communications Wiring of all systems, including cable support where open cable is specified.

2. Assumes all responsibility for all required backboxes, conduit and power connections not specifically shown as being provided by the Electrical Contractor on th e “Suggested Matrix of Scope Responsibility.”

3. Assumes all responsibility for providi ng and installing all lad der rack an d other cable management hardware (as defined in here-in).

4. Responsible for providing the Electrical Contractor with the required grounding lugs or other hardware for each piece of Communications equipment which is required to be bonded to the Communications ground system.


1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Definitions:

1. Coordination Drawings: A compilation of the pertinent layout and system drawings that show the sizes and locations, including elevations, of system components and required access areas to ensure that no two objects will occupy the same space.

a. Mechanical trades shall include, but are not limite d to, mechani cal equipment, ductwork, fire protectio n systems, plumbing piping, medical gas systems, hydronic piping, steam and steam condensate piping, and any item that may impact coordination with other disciplines.

b. Electrical trades shall include, but are not limited to, electrical equipment, conduit 1.5” and larger, conduit racks, ca ble trays, pull bo xes, transformers, raceway, busway, lig hting, ceiling-mounted devices, and any item that may impact coordination with other disciplines.

c. Technology trades shall include, but are not limited to, technolo gy equipment, racks, conduit 1.5” and larger, conduit racks, cable trays, ladder rack, pull boxes,


raceway, ceiling-mounted devices, and any item th at may impa ct coordination with other disciplines.

d. Maintenance clearances and code-required dedicated space shall be included.

e. The coordination drawings shall include all underground, underfloor, in-floor, in chase, and vertical trade items.

2. The contractors shall u se the co ordination process to identify the pro per sequence of installation of all utilities above ceiling s and in other congested areas, to e nsure an orderly and coordinated end result, and to p rovide adequate access for service and maintenance.

B. Participation:

1. The contractors and subcontractors responsible for work defined above shall participate in the coordination drawing process.

2. One contractor shall be desi gnated as t he Coordinating Contractor for purposes of preparing a complete set of composite electronic CAD coordination drawings that include all applicable trades, an d for coo rdinating the ac tivities related to this process. Th e Coordinating Contractor for this project shall be the Electrical Contractor.

a. The Coordinating Contractor shall utilize personnel familiar with requirements of this project and skilled as draftspersons/CAD operators, competent to prepare the required coordination drawings.

3. Electronic CAD drawings shall be submitted to the Coordinating Contractor for addition of work by other trades. KJWW will provide electronic fi le copies of ventilation drawings for contractor’s use if the cont ractor signs and returns an “Electronic File T ransfer” waiver provided by KJWW. KJWW will not consider bl atant reproductions of ori ginal file copies an acceptable alternative for coordination drawings.

C. Drawing Requirements:

1. The file format and file naming convention shall be coordinated with and agreed to by all contractors participating in the coordination process and the Owner.

a. Scale of drawings:

1) General plans: 1/4 Inch = 1 '-0" (minimum).

2) Mechanical, electrical, communication rooms, and in cluding the surrounding areas within 10 feet: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).

3) Shafts and risers: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).

4) Sections of shafts and mechanical and electrical equipment rooms: 1/4 Inch = 1 '-0" (minimum).

5) Sections of congested areas: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).

2. Ductwork layout drawings shall be the baseline system for other components. Ductwork layout drawings shall be modified to accommodate other components as the coordination process progresses.


3. There may be more drawings required for risers, top and bottom levels of mechanical rooms, and shafts.

4. The minimum quantity of dr awings will be established at the first coordination meeting and sent to the A/E for review. Additional dr awings may be req uired if othe r areas of congestion are discovered during the coordination process.

D. General:

1. Coordination drawing files shall be made avai lable to the A/E and Owner’s Representative. The A/E will only review identified conflicts and give an opinion, but will not perform as a coordinator.

2. A plotted set of coordination drawings shall be available at the project site.

3. Coordination drawings are not shop drawings and shall not be submitted as such.

4. The contract drawings are schemati c in nature a nd do not show eve ry fitting and appurtenance for each utility. Each contractor is expected to have included in his/her bid sufficient fittings, material, and labor to allow for adj ustments in routing of utilities mad e necessary by the coordination process and to provide a complete and functional system.

5. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time exten sions due to participation in the coordination process.

6. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time extensions for additional fittings, reroutings or changes of duct size, that are essentially equivalent sizes to those shown on the drawings and determined necessary through the coordination process.

7. The A/E reserves the right to determine space priority of equipment in the event of spatial conflicts or i nterference between equipment, piping, conduit, ducts, and equipment provided by the trades.

8. Changes to the cont ract documents that are necessary for sy stems installation and coordination shall be brought to the attention of the A/E.

9. Access panels shall preferably occur only in gypsum board walls or plaster ceilings where indicated on the drawings.

a. Access to mechanical, electrical, technology, and other items located above the ceiling shall be through accessible lay-in ceiling tile areas.

b. Potential layout changes shall be made to avoid additional access panels.

c. Additional access panels shall not be allowed without written approval from the A/E at the coordination drawing stage.

d. Providing additional access panels shall be considered after other alternatives are reviewed and discarded by the A/E and the Owner's Representative.

e. When additional access panels are re quired, they shall b e provided without additional cost to the Owner.

10. Complete the coordination drawing process and obtain sign off of the dra wings by al l contractors prior to installing any of the components.


11. Conflicts that result after the coo rdination drawings are signed off shal l be the responsibility of the contractor or subcontractor who did not properly identify their work requirements, or installed their work without proper coordination.

12. Updated coordination drawings that reflect as-built conditions may be used as re cord documents.


A. Telecommunications Structured Cabling System Standards:

1. All work and equipment shall conform to the most current ratified version of the following published standards unless otherwise indicated that draft standards are to be followed:

a. TIA/EIA 569-A – Commercial Building Standard for Tele communications Pathways and Spaces.

b. TIA/EIA 606 – Administration Standards for the T elecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings.

c. TIA/EIA 607 – Co mmercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications.

d. ANSI/NECA 568 – Standard for In stalling Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling.

e. TIA/EIA 568-B – Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard

1) B.1 – Part 1: General Requirements

2) B.1-1 – Addendum 1: Minimum 4-Pair UTP and 4-Pair ScTP Patch Cable Bend Radius.

3) B.2 – Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components.

4) B.2-1-2002– Addendum 1: Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-Pair 100 Ohm Category 6 Cabling.

5) B.3 – Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard.

f. TIA/EIA TSB-72 – Centralized Optical Fiber Cabling Guidelines.

g. ANSI FDDI Standard – Fiber Distribution Data Interface.

h. UL 444 – Standard for Safety for Communications Cable.

i. NFPA 70 (NEC) – National Electrical Code.

B. Refer to individual sections for additional Quality Assurance requirements.

C. Qualifications:

1. Only products of reputable manufacturers as determined by the Engineer will be acceptable.

2. The installing Contractor s hall be certified by the manufacturer of the structured cabling system. Documentation of certification is required at the time of bid. Shop drawings will


not be app roved until proof of ce rtification is submitted. Refer to the end of this specification section for certification documentation requirements.

3. Each Contractor and their subcontractors shall employ only workers who are skilled i n their respective trades and fully trained. All workers involved in the termination of cabling shall be individually certified by the manufacturer.

4. The Contractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this work a nd shall be required to demonstrate direct experience on recent systems of similar type and size.

5. The Contractor shall o wn and maintai n tools and equipment necessary for successful installation and testing of optical and copper structured cabling systems and have personnel adequately trained in the use of such tools and equipment.

6. The Contractor shall o btain the services of a RCDD (Registered Communications Distribution Designer) for the project. The RCDD shall perform the following tasks on the project:

a. Review contractor’s submittals and stamp the submittals with a c urrent RCDD stamp stating the submittals compliance with the contract documents.

b. Provide written and d ated confirmation of an observation of the co ntractor’s installation activities no less than every [2 weeks] [month] during the construction period.

c. Provide a final written and dated confirmation of a final construction review prior to testing.

d. Review final testing of system and provide current RCDD stamp on the documented results o r transmittal of t he results stating the test re sults compliance with the contract documents.

7. A resume of qualification shall be submitted with the Contractor’s bid i ndicating the following:

a. Documentation of ce rtification of This Contracto r by the prop osed structured cabling system manufacturer as required at the end of this specification section.

b. A list of re cently completed projects of similar type and size with contact names and telephone numbers for each.

c. A list of test equipment proposed for use in ve rifying the in stalled integrity of copper and fiber optic systems on the project.

d. A technical resume of experience for the Cont ractor’s project manager and on-site installation supervisor assigned to this project.

e. Resume and certification of the RCDD fo r the project as required by the form a t the end of this specification section.

D. Compliance with Codes, Laws, Ordinances:

1. This Contractor shall conform to all re quirements of the City of Chicago, Illinois Codes, Laws, Ordinances and other regulations having jurisdiction over this installation.

2. This Contractor shall also confo rm to all publishe d standards of Morton College as related to this installation.


3. In the event there are no local codes having jurisdiction over this job, the current issue of the National Electrical Code shall be followed.

4. If there is a discrepancy between the codes and regulations having jurisdiction over this installation, and these specifications, the code s and regulations shall determine the method or equipment used.

5. If the Contractor notes, at the time of bidding, any parts of the drawings and specifications which are not in accordance with the applicable codes or regulations, he shall inform the Architect/Engineer in writing, requesting a clarification. If there i s insufficient time to follow this pro cedure, he shall submit with the prop osal, a separate price required to make the system shown on the drawings comply with the codes and regulations.

6. All changes to the system made after the letti ng of the cont ract, in order to comply with the applicable codes or the requirements of the Inspector, shall be ma de by the Contractor without cost to the Owner.

E. Permits, Fees, Taxes, Inspections:


2. Abide by all applicable laws, regulations, ordinances, and other rules of th e State or Political Subdivision wherein the work is don e, or as required by any duly con stituted public authority.

3. Pay all applicable charges for such permits or licenses that may be required.

4. Pay all applicable fees and taxes imposed by the State, Municipal and/or other regulatory bodies.

5. Pay all charges arising out of required inspections due to codes, permits, licenses or as otherwise may be required by an authorized body.

6. Pay all cha rges arising out of required contract document reviews a ssociated with the project and as initiated by the Owner or authorized independent agency/consultant.

7. Pay any charges by the service provider related to the service or change in service to the project.

8. All equipment and materi als shall be as approved or listed by the followin g (unle ss approval or listing is not applicable to an item by all acceptable manufacturers):

a. Factory Mutual b. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.

F. Examination of Drawings:

1. The drawings for the Communications Systems work a re diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of the work a nd to indicate the general arrangements and locations of equipment etc., and the approximate sizes of equipment.

2. Contractor shall determin e the exact locatio ns of e quipment and the exact routing of cabling so as to best fit the layout of the job. Scaling of the drawings will not be sufficient or accurate for determining this layout. Where a specific route is required, such route will be indicated on the drawings.


3. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated arrangements and locations, such changes shall b e made by t he Contractor at n o additional cost to the Owner.

4. If an item is either shown on the drawings, called for in the specifications or required for proper operation of the system, it shall be con sidered sufficient for including same in this contract.

5. The determination of quantities of material and equipment required shall be made by the Contractor from the drawings. Schedules on the drawings and in the specifications are completed as an aid to the Contractor but where discrepancies arise, the greater number shall govern.

6. Where words "provide", "install", or " furnish" are used on the drawings or in th e specifications, it shall be taken to mean, to furnish, install and terminate completely ready for operation, the items mentioned.

G. Electronic Media/Files:









H. Field Measurements:

1. Before ordering any materials, this Con tractor shall verify all pertinent dimensions at the job site and be responsible for their accuracy.

2. Field conditions that will result in telecommunications drops that exceed t he length limitations identified in th e contract documents shall be b rought to the attention of th e Engineer prior to installation. The cost of reworking cabling that is too long, that was not brought to the written attention of the Engineer will be borne entirely by the Contractor.


3. This Contractor shall provide the Eng ineer with written documentation of an y cabling drops that will not be able to use the cable tray (where cable tray is available) due to the resulting cabling lengths. This documentation shall be submitted prior to installation and installation shall not commence until approved by the Engineer.

1.7 SUBMITTALS


1. Submittals list:


Section Submittal Item 17080 Through Penetration Firestopping 17110 Communication Equipment Rooms 17130 Interior Communications Pathways 17160 Horizontal Cabling Requirements 17170 Identification and Administration 17171 Testing

B. In addition to the provisions of Division 1, the following is required:

1. Submittals shall include all layout drawings; manufacturers' standard drawings; schedules; descriptive literature, catalogs and brochures; performance and test data; wiring diagrams; and all o ther drawings and descriptive data of materials of construction as may be required to sh ow that the material s, equipment or systems and the location thereof conform to the requirements of the contract documents.

2. The Contractor shall submit seven (7 ) copies of each shop drawing for review by the Architect/Engineer BEFORE releasing any equipment for manufacture or shipment.

3. Shop drawings which are larger than 11" x 17" or are plan size layout drawings such as wiring diagrams and cable tray dra wings, shall be submitted on reproducible media. Submit one reproducible and one print of each drawing or plan. All Contractor approval stamps shall be made on the rep roducible. The Architect/Engineer will return the reproducible copy of the shop d rawings, complete with comments. This Contractor shall copy and distribute these reviewed shop drawings as required. All costs for copying and distribution of reproducible shop drawings shall be i ncluded by This Contractor in their bid.

4. The Contractor shall thoroughly review and approve all shop drawings before submitting them to the Architect/Engineer. CONTRACTOR’S APPROVAL STAMP IS REQUIRED ON ALL SUBMITTALS. APPROVAL WILL I NDICATE THE CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW of all material and a COM PLETE UNDERSTANDING OF EXACTLY WHAT I S TO BE FURNISHED. Contractor shall clearly mark all deviations from the contract documents on all submittals. IF DEVIATIONS ARE NOT MARKED BY THE CONTRACTOR, THEN THE ITEM SHALL BE REQUIRE D TO M EET ALL DRA WING AND SPECI FICATION REQUIREMENTS.

5. The Contractor shall provide RCDD stamp on the submittal.

6. The Contractor shall clearly mark each item with the same nomenclature applied on the drawings or in the specifications.


7. The Contractor shall clearly indicate the size, finish, material, etc.

8. All submittals shall be assembled in sets by system.

9. Each set shall be bound in a manufacturer's folder or inside of a manila file folder.

10. Each set shall contain an index of the items enclosed with a general topic description on the cover.

11. Where more than one model is shown on a manuf acturer's sheet, the Contractor shall clearly indicate exactly which item and which data is relevant to the work.

12. Failure to comply with the above shall be reason to resubmit all shop drawing submittals.

13. The Engineer's responsibility shall be to re view one set of sho p drawing submittals for each product. If the first submittal is incomplete or does not comply with the drawings and/or specifications, the Contractor shall be responsible to bear the cost for the Engineer to recheck and handle the additional shop drawing submittals.

14. Provide documentation of all warranties required by the contract documents.

15. Submit copy of the Contra ctor certification form contai ned at the end of sp ecification section.

C. Provide Schedule of Values for Technology Work:

1. Application forms: Use AIA Document Cont inuation Sheets G703 (or similar) as the form for application.

2. Provide line items on the Schedule of Values including:

a. Structured Cabling

3. Change orders shall have schedule of values broken out as listed above submitted with each change order.

4. Coordinate with the Proje ct Engineer the items included in the S chedule of Values. Th e intent is to not create schedules in addition to those the Technology Contractor normally submits to the General Contractor for payment.

1.8 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS’ INSPECTION

A. The following equipment shall not be placed in operation until a rep resentative of the manufacturer has inspected the installation and certified that the e quipment is properly installed and that the equipment is ready for operation:

1. Firestopping, including mechanical firestop systems.

1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING & MAINTENANCE

A. Exercise care in transporting and handling to p revent damage to fixture s, equipment and materials.

B. Store materials on the site so as to prevent damage.

C. Keep fixtures, equipment and materials clean, dry and free from deleterious conditions.


1.10 WARRANTY

A. At a minimum, provide a one (1) year warranty for all equipm ent, materials, and workmanship. Individual specifications sections within Division 17 may require additional warranty requirements for specific equipment or systems.

B. The warranty period for the entire installation described in this Division of the specifications shall commence on the date of substantial completion unless a whole or partial system or any separate piece of equi pment or component is put into us e for the ben efit of any party other than the installing contractor with prior written authorization. In this instance, the warranty peri od shall commence on the date when such wh ole system, partial system or separate piece of equipment or component is placed in operation and accepted in writing by the Owner or their representative.

C. Warranty requirements shall extend to correction, without cost to the final user, of all work and/or equipment found to be defective or nonconforming to the cont ract documents. The Co ntractor shall bear the cost of correcting all damage resulting from such defects or nonconformance with contract documents exclusive of repairs required as a result of impro per maintenance or operation, or of normal wear as determined by the Architect/Engineer.

1.11 INSURANCE

A. This Contractor shall maintain insurance coverage as set forth in Divi sion 1 of these specifications.

1.12 MATERIAL

A. Where several ma nufacturers’ names are given, the first na med manufacturer constitutes the basis for job design and establishes the equipment quality required to be used in this contract.

B. Equivalent equipment manufactured by the other named manufacturers may be used. Contractor shall ensure that all items submitted by these other manufacturers meets all requirements of the drawings and specifications and fits in the allocated space. The Engineer shall make the fi nal determination of whether a product is equivalent.

C. Any material, article or equipment of other unnamed manufacturers which will adequately perform the services and duties imposed by t he design and is of a qu ality equal to or bette r than the material, article or equipment identified by t he drawings and specifications may be u sed if approval is secured in writing from the Architect/Engineer not later than ten (10) days prior to the bid opening date. The Contracto r bears full responsibility for the unnam ed manufacturers equipment adequately meeting the intent of design. T he Architect/Engineer may reject manufacturer at time of s hop drawing submittal. The Contractor assumes all costs incurred by other trades on the project as a result of changes necessary to accom modate the offered material, equipment or installation method.

D. Should this Contractor be unable to secure app roval from t he Architect/Engineer for other unnamed manufacturers as outlined above, this Contractor may list voluntary add or deduct prices for alternate materials on the bid form. These items will not be used in determining the low bidder. Should a voluntary alternate material be accepted, This Contractor shall assume all costs that may be incu rred as a result of using the offered material, article or equipment necessitating extra expense on This Contractor or on the part of other Contractors whose work is affected.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REFER TO INDIVIDUAL SECTIONS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 JOBSITE SAFETY

A. Neither the professional activities of the Engineer, nor the presence of the Engineer or his or her employees and subconsultants at a co nstruction site, shall relieve the Contractor and any other entity of their obligations, duties and responsibilities including, but not limited to, construction means, methods, sequence, techniques or procedures necessary for performing, superintending or coordinating all portions of the work of construction in accordance with the contract documents and any health or safety precautions required by any regulatory agencies. The Engineer and his or her personnel have no authority to exerci se any control over any con struction contractor or other entity or their employees in connection with their work or any health or safety precautions. The Contractor is solely responsible for job site safety. The Engine er and the Engine er’s consultants shall be in demnified and shall b e made additional insureds under the Contractor’s general liability insurance policy.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Installation of all conduit and cabling shall comply with Sections 16111 and 16120. Additional conduit requirements described within this Divi sion shall be supplemental to the requirement described in Section 16111. Should conflicts exist between the two Divisions the more st ringent (more expensive material and labor) condition shall p revail until bidding addendum or construction clarification or RFI can b e submitted and responded to. In n o case shall the Contractor carry the least stringent condition in the pricing.

B. It is the Cont ractor’s responsibility to survey the site and include all necessary costs to perform the installation as specified.

C. The Contractor shall b e responsible for identifying and reporting to the Engineer any existing conditions including but not limited to damag e to walls, floorin g, ceiling and furnishings prior to start of work. All d amage to interior spaces caused by this Contractor shall be repaired at this Contractor’s expense to pre-existing conditions, including final colors and finishes.


A. General:

1. Refer to specific Division 17 sections for further requirements.

2. The Contractor shall conduct all tests required and applicable to the work both during and after construction of the work.

3. The necessary instruments and materials required to conduct or make the tests shall be supplied by t he Contractor who shall also supply competent personnel for making the tests who has been schooled in the proper testing techniques.

4. In the event the results obtained in the tests are not satisfactory, This Contractor shall make such a djustments, replacements and changes as are necessary and shall the n repeat the test or tests which disclose faulty or defective wo rk or equipment, and shall make such additional tests as the Architect/Engineer or code enforcing agency deems necessary.


5. All telecommunications tests that fail, i ncluding those due to excessive cabling lengths, shall be remedied by the Contractor without cost to the project.

B. Protection of cable from foreign materials:

1. It is the Contractor’s responsi bility to provide adequate physi cal protection to prevent foreign material application or contact with any cable type. Foreign material is defined as any material that would negatively impact the validity of the manufacturer’s performance warranty. This includes, but is not limited, to overspray of paint (accidental or otherwise), drywall compound, or any other surface chemical, liquid or compound that could come in contact with the cable, cable jacket or cable termination components.

2. Overspray of paint on any cable, cable jacket or cable termination component will not be accepted. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to replace any component containing overspray, in its entirety, at no additional cost to the project. Cleaning of the cables with harsh chemicals is not all owed. This requirement is rega rdless of the PASS/FAIL test results of the cable containing overspray. Should the manufacturer and warrantor of the structured cabling system desire to physically inspect the in stalled condition and certify the validity of the stru ctured cabling system (via a signed and dated statement by an authorized representative of the struct ured cabling manufacturer), the Owner may, at their sole discretion, agree to accept said warranty in lieu of havi ng the affected cables replaced. In the case of plenum cabling, in addition to th e statement from th e manufacturer, the Contractor shall also present to the Owner a letter from the l ocal Authority Having Jurisdiction stating that they consider the plenum rating of the cabl e to be intact and acceptable.


A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: P ROJECT CLOSEOUT for requirements. The foll owing paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.


1. The Engineer will not perform a final jobsite observation until the project is ready. This is not dictated by schedule, but rather by completeness of the project.

2. Refer to th e end of this specification section for a “STATEMENT INDICATING READINESS FOR FINAL JOBSITE OBSERVATION.”

3. The Contractor shall sign this fo rm and return it to the Engin eer so that the final observation can commence.

C. Before final payment will be authorized, this Contractor must have completed the following:

1. Submitted operation and maintenance manuals to the Architect/Engineer for review.

2. Submitted bound copies of approved shop drawings.

3. Record documents including edited drawings and specifications accurately reflecting field conditions, inclusive of all project revisions, change orders, and modifications.

4. Submitted a report stating t he instructions given to the O wner's representative complete with the number of hours spent in the instruction. The report shall bear the signature of an authorized agent of This Contractor and shall be signed by the Owner's representative as having received the instructions.

5. Submitted testing reports for all systems requiring final testing as described herein.


6. Submitted start-up reports on all equipment requiring a factory installation inspection and/or start.

7. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification sections. Deliver to project site; submit receipt to Architect/Engineer prior to final payment being approved.

8. Provide System Assurance Warranty certificate for the telecommunications system.


A. Submit three (3) p roperly indexed an d bound copies, in “D” ring style notebooks, of the Operations and Maintenance Instructions to t he Architect/Engineer for approval. Ma ke all corrections or additions required.

B. Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall include:

1. Notebooks shall be heavy duty locking three ring binde rs and inco rporate clear vinyl sheet sleeves on the front cover and spine for slip-in labeling. “Peel and stick” labels are not acceptable. Sheet lift ers shall be supplied at the front of each notebook. Provide “Wilson-Jones” or eq ual, color black. Size notebooks a minimum of 1/2" thicker than material for future inserts. Label th e spine and front cover of each notebook. If more than one notebook is required, label in consecutive order. For example; 1 of 2, 2 of 2. No other forms of binding will be acceptable.

2. Prepare binder covers (front and spine) with printed title “Op eration and Maintenance Instructions”, title of project, and sub ject matter o f binder whe n multiple bi nders are required.

3. Title page with project title, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, and Subcontractor with addresses, telephone numbers, and contacts.

4. Table of Contents describing all index tabs.

5. Listing of all Subcontractors and major equipment suppliers with addresses, telephone numbers, and contacts.

6. Index tabs dividing information by specification section, major equipment, or systems. All tab titles shall be clearly printed under reinforced plastic tags.

7. Copies of warranties.

8. Copies of all final approved shop drawings and submittals.

9. Copies of all factory inspection and/or equipment start-up reports.

C. Operation and maintenance data shall consist of written instructions for the care, maintenance, and operation of the equipment and systems. Instruction books, cards, manuals furnished with the equipment shall be included.

3.6 INSTRUCTING THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE

A. Adequately instruct the Owner's designated representative or representatives in the maintenance, care, and operation of the complete systems installed under this contract.

B. Provide verbal and writte n instructions to t he Owner's representative or re presentatives by FACTORY PERSONNEL in the care, maintenance, and operation of the equipment and systems.


C. The Owner has the option to video tape the instructions to the Owner. Coordinate schedule of instructions to facilitate this recording.

D. The Architect/Engineer shall be notified of the tim e and place for the verbal instructions to be given to the Owner's representative so that their representative can be present if desirable.

E. Refer to the individual specification sections for minimum hours of in struction time f or each system.

F. Operating Instructions:

1. The Contractor is responsible for all in structions to the Owner and/or Owner’s operating staff on the Communications Systems.

2. If the Contractor d oes not have Enginee rs and/or Technicians on staff that can adequately provide the required instructions on system o peration, performance, troubleshooting, care and maintenance, they shall include in the bid an adequate amount to reimburse the Owner for the Engineer to perform these services.

3.7 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING

A. The Communications Systems included in the con struction documents are to be complete and operating systems. The A rchitect/Engineer will make periodic job site ob servations during the construction period. Th e system start-up, testing, configuration, and satisfactory system performance is the responsibility of the Co ntractor. Thi s shall include all calibration and adjustments of electrical equipm ent controls, equipment settings, soft ware configuration, troubleshooting and verification of software, and final adjustments that may be required.

B. All operating conditions and control sequences shall be simulated and tested during the start-up period.

C. The Contractor, subcontractors, and equipment suppliers are expected to have skilled technicians to insure that the system performs as designed. If the Architect/Engineer is requested to visit the job site for t he purpose of trouble shooting, assisting in the satisfacto ry start-up, obtaining satisfactory equipment operation, resolving installation and/or workmanship problems, equipment substitution issues or unsatisfactory system performance, including call backs during the warranty period through no fault of the desi gn; the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner on a time and material basis for services rendered at the Architect/Engineer's standard hourly rates in effect at the time the services are requested. The Contractor shall be responsible for making payment to the Owner for services required that are product, installation or workmanship related. Payment is due within 30 days after services are rendered.


A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: P ROJECT CLOSEOUT for requirements. The foll owing paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.

B. Mark specifications to indicate approved substitutions, change orders, and actual equipment and materials used.

C. This Contractor shall maintain at the jo b site, a separate and complete set of Communications Drawings which shall be clea rly and perm anently marked and noted in co mplete detail any changes made to the location and arra ngement of equipment or made to the Comm unications Systems and wiring as a result of building construction conditions or as a result of inst ructions from the Architect o r Engineer. All Change Orders, RFI respo nses, Clarifications and other supplemental instructions shall be marked on the documents. Record documents that merely


reference the existence of the above items are not acceptable. Should This Contractor fail to complete Record Documents as required by this contract, This Co ntractor shall reimburse Architect/Engineer for all costs to develop record documents that comply with this requirement. Reimbursement shall b e made at the Architect/Engineer’s hourly rates in effe ct at the time of work.

D. The above record of changes shall be m ade available for the Archite ct and Engineer's examination during any regular work time.

E. Upon completion of the job, and before final payment is ma de, This Contractor shall give the marked-up drawings to the Architect/Engineer.


A. Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and systems prior to th e Owner's f inal acceptance of the project.

B. Contractor shall clean all foreign paint, grease, oil, dirt, labels, stickers, and other foreign material from equipment.

C. Contractor shall remove all rubbish, debris, etc., accumulated during the Contractor's operations from the premises.

END OF SECTION


STATEMENT INDICATING READINESS FOR FINAL JOBSITE OBSERVATION In order to assist the contractor i n a timely close-out of the project, it is crucial that the final jobsite o bservation is not conducted prior to the project being ready. The contra ctor is required to review the completion status of the project at the time the observation is scheduled. This review, and the subsequent submittal of this form to the Engineer, shall indicate the contra ctor’s agreement that the area of the project being requested for fina l observation is ready as defined below. The following list represents the degree of completeness required prior to requesting a final observation:

1. All cabling pathways (cable tray, ladder rack, conduit sleeves, etc) are installed and all cabling has been pulled through them.

2. All mechanical firestop products are installed and all other penetrations have been sealed.

3. All telecommunications jacks are installed in the faceplates.

4. All telecommunications cabling is pulled and at lea st 75% of all jacks h ave been terminated at the jack and at the telecom room.

5. Telecommunications testing is in progress and at least 25% of testing has been completed.

6. Telecommunications labeling has been provided on at least 25% of each type of component requiring a label.

7. All telecommunications related grounding is complete.

The project will be ready for final jobsit e observation prior to the requested dat e of the observation, according to the above list of requirement.

Prime Contractor: _________________________ By: _____________________________

Requested Observation Date ________________ Today’s Date: _____________________ Contractor shall sign this readiness statement and transmit to Engineer at least 10 days prior to the re quested date of observation. It is un derstood that if th e Engineer finds that the project is not complete as defined above and that th e final jobsite observation cannot be completed on the requested date, the Engineer will return to the site at a later date. All additional visits to th e site fo r the purposes of completing the final observation will be billed T&M to the Contractor at our standard hourly rates, including travel expenses or the contractor’s retainage may be deducted for the same amount.


Telecommunications – Proof of Certification

There are specific Contractor qualification requirements for this project a s defined in specification section 17010, which may include Manufacturer Certification and RCDD credentials. This P roof of Certification document, and the supporting documentation require herein, is required to be submitted at the time of bid to show compliance with the requirements of 17010.

Statement of Compliance:

The named Contractor’s base bid is a structured cabling solution from the connectivity manufacturer ___________________. Named Contractor is trained and certified, under the named manufacturer’s formal certification program to provide and install all materials and work required by this project. Further, said Contractor is authorized, by the named manufacturer, to offer all product, labor and system assurance warranties required for this project by these contract documents.

The certification of this n amed manufacturer is valid, current and in effect as of the bid da y of this proj ect, the ______ day of _________, 20____.

The named Contractor is not employing any other sub-contractor on the telecommunications portion of this project that does not also meet this certification requirement.

Contractor Company Name: ________________________________________________________

Authorized Representative: (print) ____________________________________________________

Date: _________________ Manufacturer Certification Number (if any): ___________________

If this project requires RCDD certification, complete the following:

RCDD Name: __________________________ RCDD #: ____________ Expiration: ____________

Submit the following with the bid:

This form.

Proof of Manufacturer Certification indicated above.

Proof of RCDD status.

MORTON COLLEGE TECHNOLOGY DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 17060 TECHNOLOGY DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Technology demolition.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 17010 - Basic Communications Systems Requirements.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Materials and equipment for te rminating, patching and cross connecting of existing telecommunications and security systems shall be as specified in individual Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. THE DRAWINGS ARE INTENDED TO INDICATE THE SCOPE OF WORK REQUIRED AND DO NOT INDICATE EVERY OUTLET, BOX, CONDUIT, OR CABLE THAT MUST BE REMOVED.

B. THE CONTRACTOR SHA LL VISIT THE SITE PRIOR TO SUB MITTING A BID AND VE RIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND SCOPE OF WORK.

C. Whenever possible, the Contractor shall coil existing cable above ceiling for re-termination if cable length will allow. Re-terminated cables shall be tested for wire map and continuity.

D. Where walls, ceilings, structures, etc., are indicated as being renovated on general drawings, the Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of all technology equipment including but not limited to: copper, fiber and coaxial cable, faceplates and jacks, raceways, racking and equipment mounted to the racking, etc., from the renovated area.

E. Where ceilings, walls, st ructures, etc., are te mporarily removed and repla ced by others, this Contractor shall be responsible for the removal, storage, and replacement of equipment, devices, fixtures, raceways, wiring, systems, etc.

F. Verify that aband oned wiring and equipment serve only aba ndoned equipment or fa cilities. Extend conduit and wire to facilities and equipm ent that will remain in operation following demolition. Extension of conduit and wire to equipment shall be compatible with the surrounding area.

G. Coordinate scope of work with all other Contractors and the Owner at the project site. Schedule removal of equipment and technology service to avoid conflicts.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Not all services within the building will be inactive or abandoned. Verify abandonment status with the building owner, General Contractor and engineer prior to demolition.

B. Prior to commencing with demolition, a proposed implementation narrative with schedule shall be submitted to the engineer for approval.

C. The contractor shall provide proof that only qualified personnel with extensive telecommunications experience will perform the demolition. No laborers will be allowed in the cable removal process.

D. The contractor shall coordinate with owner to verify all cabling, patch cords and cross connects have been removed from active equipment that is to remain during the duration of the renovation.

E. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on active equipment, use technicians experienced in such o perations. A ssume all equipment and systems must remain operational unless specifically noted otherwise on drawings.

3.3 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING TECHNOLOGY WORK

A. Demolish and extend exi sting technology work under provisions of Division 1 of Archite ctural Specifications and this Section.

B. Some cabling within the ceiling space may serve other building tenants; care shall be exercised to prevent service interrupts.

C. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

D. Remove abandoned low voltage cabling and raceway to source of cabling according to the NEC. Refer to the NEC for definition of Abandoned Communications Cabling.

E. Remove exposed abandoned raceway, including abandoned raceway above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut race way flush with wall s and floors, and patch surfaces. Remove all associated clamps, hangers, supports, etc. associated with raceway removal.

F. Disconnect abandoned outlets and re move devices. Remove abandoned outlets if co nduit servicing them is removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets th at are not removed. Patch openings created from removal of devices to match surrounding finishes.

G. Disconnect and remove abandoned patch panels, blocks and other distribution equipment.

H. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. Patch openings to match existing surrounding finishes.

I. Maintain access to exis ting technology installations that rem ain active. Modify installat ion or provide access panels as appropriate.

J. Extend existing in stallations using materials and methods compatible with existing technology installations, or as specified.

K. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

L. This Contractor is responsible for all costs incurred in repair, relocations, or replacement of any cables, conduits, or other services if damaged without proper investigation.



A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or are to be reused.

B. Patch panels, blocks and other con nectivity equipment: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of connections. Re -terminate any loo se connections; the co ntractor shall n otify the engineer of any permanently damaged or unusable equipment.

C. TECHNOLOGY ITEMS (E.G., PATCH PANELS, EQUIPMENT RACKS, JACKS, FACEPLATES, BLOCKS, CABLING, ETC.) REMOVED AND NOT RELOCATED REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF THE OWNER. THE CONTRA CTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE DISPOSA L OF MATERIAL THE OWNER DOES NOT WANT.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Install relocated materials and e quipment under the provisi ons of ap plicable Division 17 specifications.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 17080 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Through-Penetration Firestopping.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials B. ANSI/UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops C. UL Fire Resistance Directory Through Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ) D. Warnock Hersey - Directory of Listed Products E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials F. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops G. The Building Officials and Code Administrators National Building Code H. 1997 Uniform Building Code I. Wisconsin Administrative Code J. 2006 International Building Code K. NFPA 5000 – Building Construction Safety Code

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: For penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openi ngs and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls including fire partitions, fire barriers, and smoke barriers. 2. Fire-resistance-rated horizontal assemblies including floors, floor/ceiling assemblies, and

ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies.

B. Rated Systems: P rovide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per UL 1479:

1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than that equalin g or e xceeding fire-resistance rating of con structions penetrated.

2. T-Rated Systems: Fo r the followi ng conditions, provide th rough-penetration firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings:

a. Floor penetrations located outside wall cavities. b. Floor penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.

C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to light, traffic, moisture, or physical damage, provide products that, after cu ring, do not det eriorate when exposed to the se conditions both during and after construction.

D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, prov ide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determi ned per ASTM E 84.


E. For through-penetration firestop systems in air plenums, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 50, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 17011.

B. Submit Firestopping Installers Certification for all installers on the project.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit for ea ch condition requiring firestopping. Includ e descriptions of the specific penetrating item, actual wall/fl oor construction, manufacturer’s installation instructions, and UL or Warnock Hersey Assembly number.

D. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-penetration firestop system, along with the following information:

1. Types of penetrating items. 2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where

applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated. 3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identifi ed by firesto p design

designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 4. F and T ratings for each firestop system.

E. Maintain a notebook on the job site at all times that contains copies of approved submittals for all through penetration firestopping to b e installed. Notebook shall be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction at their requ est and turned over to the Owner at the end of construction as part of the O&M Manuals.


A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section.

B. Installer: Individuals performing work shall be certified by the manufacturer of the system selected for installation.

1.6 MEETINGS

A. Pre-installation meeting: A pre-installation meeting shall b e scheduled and shall in clude the Construction Manager, General Contractor, all Subcontractors associated with the installatio n of systems penetrating fire barriers, Firestopping Manufacturer’s Representative, and the Owner.

1. Review foreseeable methods related to firestopping work.

2. Tour representative areas where firestopping is to be installed; inspect and discuss each type of condition and each type of substrate that will be encountered, and preparation to be performed by other trades.


A. Store, protect and handl e products on site. A ccept material on site in facto ry containers and packing. Inspect for damage. Protect from deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for storage.

B. Install material prior to expiration of product shelf life.


1.8 WARRANTY

A. Provide one year warranty on parts and labor.

B. Warranty shall cover rep air or repla cement of firestop systems which fail in joint adhe sion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance, general durability, or appear to deteriorate in any manner not clearly specified by the manufacturer as an inherent quality of the material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to co mpliance with requirements, provide o ne of the through-pen etration firestop systems indicated for each application that are p roduced by o ne of the follo wing manufacturers. All firestopping systems installed shall be provided by a single manufacturer.

1. 3M; Fire Protection Produces Division. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. RectorSeal Corporation, Metacaulk. 4. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division. 5. Johns-Manville. 6. Specified Technologies Inc. (S.T.I.) 7. Spec Seal Firestop Products 8. AD Firebarrier Protection Systems 9. Wiremold/legrand: FlameStopper

2.2 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

A. Provide materials and systems classified by or listed by Warnock Hersey to provide firestopping equal to time rating of construction being penetrated.

B. All firestopping materials shall be free of asbestos, lead, PCB’s, and other materials that would require hazardous waste removal.

C. Firestopping shall be flexible to allow for normal penetrating item movement due to exp ansion and contraction.

D. Firestopping systems for plumbing and wet pipe sprinkler piping shall be moisture resistant.

E. Provide firestopping systems capable of supporting floor lo ads where systems are exposed to possible floor loading or traffic.

F. Provide firestopping systems allowing continuous insulation for all insulated pipes.

G. Provide firestopping systems classified by UL or listed by Warnock Hersey for p enetrations through all fire rated construction. Firestopping systems shall be selected from the UL or listed by Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory Category XHEZ based on substrate construction and penetrating item size and material and shall fall within the range of numbers listed:


1. Combustible Framed Floors and Chase Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated F Rating = Floor/Wall Rating T Rating = Floor/Wall Rating

Penetrating Item UL System No. No Penetrating Item FC 0000-0999* Metallic Pipe or Conduit FC 1000-1999 Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit FC 2000-2999 Electrical Cables FC 3000-3999 Cable Trays FC 4000-4999 Insulated Pipes FC 5000-5999 Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical FC 6000-6999 Duct without Damper and Misc. Mechanical FC 7000-7999 Multiple Penetrations FC 8000-8999

2. Non-Combustible Framed Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated F Rating = Wall Rating T Rating = 0

Penetrating Item UL System No. No Penetrating Item WL 0000-0999* Metallic Pipe or Conduit WL 1000-1999 Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit WL 2000-2999 Electrical Cables WL 3000-3999 Cable Trays WL 4000-4999 Insulated Pipes WL 5000-5999 Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical WL 6000-6999 Duct without Damper and Misc. Mechanical WL 7000-7999 Multiple Penetrations WL 8000-8999

3. Concrete or Masonry Floors and Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated F Rating = Wall/Floor Rating T Rating (Floors) = Floor Rating

Penetrating Item UL System No. No Penetrating Item CAJ 0000-0999* Metallic Pipe or Conduit CAJ 1000-1999 Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit CAJ 2000-2999 Electrical Cables CAJ 3000-3999 Cable Trays CAJ 4000-4999 Insulated Pipes CAJ 5000-5999 Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical CAJ 6000-6999 Duct without Damper and Misc. Mechanical CAJ 7000-7999 Multiple Penetrations CAJ 8000-8999

*Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to match original rated construction.

H. Any opening in walls or floors not covered by the listed series of numbers shall be coordinated with the firestopping manufacturer.


I. Any openings in floors or walls not described in the UL or listed by Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory, or outlined i n manufacturer’s information shall be sealed in a manner agreed upon by the Firestopping Manufacturer, Owner, and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Ensure all surfaces that contact seal materials are free of dirt, dust, grease, oil, ru st, or l oose materials. Clean and repair surfaces as required. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Ensure substrate and pe netrating items have be en permanently installed prior to installing firestopping systems. Ensure pe netrating items hav e been p roperly spaced and have p roper clearance prior to installing firestopping systems.

C. Surfaces to which sealing materials are to be installed must meet the selected UL or Warnock Hersey system substrate criteria.

D. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by thro ugh-penetration firestop system manufacturer. Confine primer to area of bond.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. In existing construction, provide firestopping of openings prior to a nd after installation of penetrating items. Remove any existi ng coatings on surfaces prior to fire stopping installation. Temporary firestopping shall consist of packing openings with fire resistant mineral wool for the full thickness of substrate, or an alternate method approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. All openings shall be temporarily firestopped immediately upon their installation and shall remain so until the permanent UL or listed by Warnock Hersey listed firestopping system is installed.

B. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instructions of th e UL o r Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory and with the manufacturer’s printed application instructions.

C. Install dams as re quired to prope rly contain firestopping materials within openings and as required to achi eve required fire re sistance rating. Remov e combustible damming after appropriate curing.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean excess fill material s adjacent to openin gs as Work pro gresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in wr iting by through -penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not cause damage.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.4 INSPECTION

A. All penetrations shall be inspected by the manufacturer’s representative to ensure p roper installation.


B. Access to firestop systems shall be maintained for examin ation by the Authority Having Jurisdiction at their request.

C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop system with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.

D. The contractor shall allow for visual destructive review of 5 % of installed firestop systems (minimum of one) to prove compliance with specifications and manufacturer’s instructions and details. Destructive system removal shall be performed by the contractor and witnessed by the engineer and manufacturer’s factory representative. The engineer shall have sole discretion of which firestop system installations will be reviewed. The contractor is responsible for all costs associated with this requirement including labor and material for removing and replacing the installed firestop system. If any firestop system is found to not be installed per manufacturer’s specific instructions and details, all firestop systems are subject to d estructive review and replacement at the engineer’s discretion and the contractor’s expense.

END OF SECTION

MORTON COLLEGE COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT ROOMS Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 17110 COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT ROOMS (CER)

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This section describes the products and ex ecution requirements related to furnishin g and installing equipment for Communication Equipment Rooms. Communication Equipment Rooms include rooms for the Mai n Cross Connect (MC), Intermediate Cross Conn ect (IC), Ho rizontal Cross Connect (HC), Serv ice Entrance Room (SER) and Equipment Room (ER) (such as data centers and main computer rooms housing servers, mainframes and other central equipment).

B. Definitions:

1. Main Cross Connect (MC): Allows single point administration of technology components for cross-connect of first level backbone cables, entrance cables and equipment cables.

2. Intermediate Cross Connect (IC): Cross connect location between a backbone cable extending from the main cro ss connect (first level backb one) and the backb one cable from the horizontal cross connect (second level backbone).

3. Horizontal Cross Connect (HC): Cross connect location between the horizontal cabling and the backbone cabling.

4. Service Entrance Room: Acco mmodates a single location fo r incoming services to terminate and indi cates an interface point and division of responsibility between the building cabling system and the service provider (herein referred to as the demarc).

C. Refer to Specification Section 17130 for cable pathway and support requirements.


A. Section 17010 - Basic Communications Systems Requirements B. Section 17130 - Interior Communication Pathways C. Section 17160 - Horizontal Cabling Requirements


A. Refer to Section 17010 for applicable standards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Under the provisions of Section 17 010 and Division 1, prior to the start of work the Contractor shall submit:

1. Manufacturer’s data covering all products including construction, materials, ratings and all other parameters identified in Part 2 - Products, below.

2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.


B. Coordination Drawings:

1. Include ladder racking, equipment racks, cable tray and co nduit sleeve layout in composite electronic coordination files. Refer to Section 17010 fo r coordination drawing requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PATCH PANELS

A. Where identified on the drawings in Communication Equipment Rooms, modular patch panels shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor for termination of copper cable.

B. Copper cabling shall be terminated in Communication Equipment Rooms on modular patch panels consisting of a modula r connector system incorporating modular jacks meeting the specifications for the jacks detailed in Section 17160.

C. The largest single modular patch panel configuration shall not exceed 48-Ports. Modular patch panels shall be fully populated (all ports occupied by jacks) and be provided in increments of no less than 12 jacks. High-density modular patch panels will not be accepted.

D. The modular patch pan el blocks shall have t he ability to seat and cut eig ht (8) condu ctors (4 pairs) at a time and shall have the ability of terminating 22- through 26-gauge plastic insulated, solid and stranded copper conductors. Modular patch panel blocks shall be designed to maintain the cables’ pair twists as closely as possible to the point of mechanical termination.

E. Modular patch panels shall incorporate cable support and/or strain relief mechanisms to secure the horizontal cables at the termination block and to ensure that all manufacturers minimum bend radius specifications are adhered to.

2.2 D-RINGS

A. Rounded edge D-rings for support of cabling in vertical and horizontal configurations.

B. EIA 310D compliant, manufactured from materials meeting UL94-V0 specifications.

C. Provide ¼” screw holes for wall mounting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 D-RINGS

A. Provide D-rings for cable routing and management in all areas where open cabling is routed along the wall in an Equipment Room.

B. Locate D-rings on 24” centers vertically and horizontally.

C. Securely attach D-rings to the wall as required by the manufacturer.

3.2 CONDUITS AND CABLE ROUTING

A. Refer to Section 16111 for additional requirements.


B. Where conduits enter a telecommunications room, conduits shall be terminated on the wall where shown on the contract documents. Conduits entering the room from the flo or shall extend 3” above the floor slab.

C. Where cabling rises vertically in a telecommunications rooms, provide vertical cable management to support the cabling from floor to ceiling level.

D. All conduits shall be reamed and shall be installed with a nylon bushing.

E. Maintain appropriate conduit bend radius at all times. For conduits with an internal diameter of 2” or less, maintain a bend radius of at least 6 times the internal diameter. For conduits with an internal diameter greater than 2”, maintain a bend radius of at least 10 times the i nternal diameter.

END OF SECTION

MORTON COLLEGE INTERIOR COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 17130 INTERIOR COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The work covered under this section consists of the furnishing of all necessary labor, supervision, materials, equipment, tests and services to install complete wire mesh support systems, conduits, sleeves, innerduct, etc. for an interior cabling plant as shown on the drawings.

B. Wire mesh support systems are defined to inclu de, but are not limited to straight sectio ns of continuous wire mesh, field formed horizontal and vertical bends, tees, drop outs, supports and accessories.


A. Section 16111 - Conduit B. Section 17010 - Basic Communications Systems Requirements C. Section 17050 - Communications Bonding

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code

1.4 DRAWINGS

A. The drawings, which constitute a part of these specifications, indicate the general route of the wire mesh support systems, conduit, sleeves, etc. Data presented on these drawings is as accurate as preliminary surveys and planning can determine until final equi pment selection is made. Accu racy is not guaranteed and field ve rification of al l dimensions, routing, et c., is required.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Under the provisions of Section 1 7010 and Division 1, prior to th e start of wo rk the Contractor shall submit:

1. Manufacturer’s data covering all p roducts proposed, including construction, materials, ratings and all other parameters identified in Part 2 - Products, below.


B. Coordination Drawings:

1. Include cable tray and conduit sleeve layout in composite electronic coordination files. Refer to Section 17010 for coordination drawing requirements.


A. Refer to Section 17010 for requirements.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT

A. Refer to Section 16111 for conduit requirements for this project.

2.2 CABLE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide a non-continuous cable support system suitable for use with open cable.

B. Cable Hooks:

1. Construction: Flat bottom design with a minimum cable bearing surface of 1-5/8”. Hooks shall have 90-degree radius edges.

2. All cable hook mounting hardware shall be recessed to prevent damage to ca ble during installation. Installed cabling shall be secured using a cable latch retainer that shall be removable and reusable.

3. Finish: Pre-galvanized steel, ASTM A653 suitable for general duty use zinc plated steel, ASTM B633 SC3 suitable for heavy d uty use. Provide stainless steel AISI Type 304 hooks for corrosive locations.

C. Cable Hangers:

1. Adjustable, non-continuous cable support slings for use with low voltage cabling.

2. Steel and wo ven laminate construction, rated for i ndoor non-corrosive use. Laminate material shall be suitable for use in plenum environments.

3. Sling length shall be adjustable to a capacity of 425 4-pair UTP cables.

4. Cabling hanger load limit shall be 100 lbs per foot.

5. Manufacturer: Erico Cadd y CableCat CAT425, Arlington Fittings Tl Series or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CABLE HOOK SUPPORT SYSTEM

A. In areas where cabling is not supported by cable tray, ladder rack, enclosed wireway or installed in conduit, such cabling shall be supported by an approved cable hook support system.

B. Refer to manufacturer’s requirements for allowable fill capacity f or selected cable hook. I n no case shall a 40% fill capacity be exceeded.

C. Cable hooks shall be securely mounted per manufacturer’s instructions. In no case shall the side-to-side travel of any cable hook exceed 6”.

D. Cable hooks shall be selected based on the contractors cable routing. Hooks shall be capable of supporting a minimum of 30 pounds with a safety factor of 3.

E. Support spans shall be based on the manufacturer’s load ratings. In no case shall a 5 foot span be exceeded.


F. The resting and supporting of cabling on structural members shall not meet the requirements for cabling support specified herein.

G. The use of tie-wraps or hook and loop type fasteners is specifically prohibited as a substitute for cable hooks specified herein.

3.2 CONDUIT AND CABLE ROUTING

A. Refer to specification section 16111 for additional requirements.

B. All conduits shall be reamed and shall be installed with a nylon bushing.

C. Maintain appropriate conduit bend radius at all times. For conduits with an internal diameter of 2” or less, maintain a bend radius of at least 6 times the internal diameter. For conduits with an internal diameter greater than 2”, maintain a bend radius of at least 10 times the i nternal diameter.

D. No conduit or sleeve containing more than two (2) cables shall exceed 40% fill ratio, regardless of length.

E. Any conduit excee ding 90’ in length or contai ning more than th ree (3) 90-degree bends shall contain a pull box sized per ANSI/TIA/EIA 569 requirements.

1. A separate pull box is required for each 90’ (or greater) length section.

2. A separate pull box is required after any three (3) consecutive 90-degree bends.

3. Pull box shall be l ocated in an area t hat maintains accessibility of box, including the ability to remove box lid without removal or relocation of any other materials.

F. Any conduit with bends totaling 90 degrees or more shall have the fill capacity derated by 15% for each 90 degrees of cumulative bend.

G. Cables installed in any conduits that do not meet the above requirements shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense, after the conduit condition has been remedied.

3.3 ATTACHMENT TO METAL DECKING

A. Where supports for cable trays and cable hook systems attach to metal roof decking, excluding concrete on metal decking, do not exceed 25 lb s. per hangar and a minimum spacing of 2’-0” on center. This 25 lb. load and 2’-0” spacing include adjacent electrical and m echanical items hanging from deck. If the hanger restrictions cannot be achieved, supplemental framing off steel framing will need to be added.


MORTON COLLEGE HORIZONTAL CABLING REQUIREMENTS Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 17160 HORIZONTAL CABLING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This section describes the produ cts and exe cution requirements relating to furnishin g and installing horizontal communications cabling and termination components and related subsystems as part of a cabling plant. The cabling plant consists of copper cabling.


A. Section 17010 - Basic Communications Systems Requirements


A. Refer to Section 17010 for relevant standards.

B. The channel shall be required to me et the performance requirements indicated herein. The manufacturer shall warranty the perfo rmance of their system to the required performance (and not just to the Standard, should the required performance exceed the Standard).

C. Specific components of the channel shall be req uired, at a minimum, to meet the Standard component requirements for that particular component.

D. The installing contractor must be certified by the manufacturer of the structured cabling system.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer’s data covering all p roducts proposed, including construction, materials, ratings and all other parameters identified in Part 2 - Products, below.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HORIZONTAL CABLE

A. CAT 6 Plenum Cable:

1. The horizontal cable requirements must be met as well as the following channel requirements.

2. CAT 6 cable shall terminate on rack-mounted modular patch panels in their respe ctive Communication Equipment Room as indicated on the drawings.

3. Performance Tests shall be conducted at a discrete test frequ ency of 250 MHz for the channel. All numbers given are for a 4-connection channel.

4. Performance data shall be provided by third party independent testing laboratories only. Testing data shall be submitted on the third party testing laboratory letterhead. Test data


will only be accepted if it displays testing as a channel. Electrical characteristics of the performance of the cable itself will not satisfy this requirement.

5. The structured cabling and co nnectivity may be provid ed by the same company. Alternately, ally or p artnerships between cabling manufacturers and connectivity manufacturers will be acceptable. Ad-hoc cabling solutions in which th e cabling manufacturer does not have a relationship, agreement, or oth er means of support channel arranged with the connectivity manufacturer will not be accepted.

6. Channel Requirements:

Insertion Loss: 250 MHz 34.1 dB NEXT: 250 MHz 36.1 dB PS NEXT: 250 MHz 33.2 dB ACR: 250 MHz 3.0 dB PS ACR: 250 MHz 1.3 dB ELFEXT 250 MHz 19.3 dB PS ELFEXT: 250 MHz 15.3 dB Return Loss: 250 MHz 10 dB

7. The jacket color for CAT 6 cable shall be white for voice applications and blue for data applications.

8. Basis of Design:

a. Panduit PUP6000CMP

2.2 FACEPLATES/JACKS

A. CAT 6 Jacks:

1. CAT 6 horizontal cable shall each be terminated at their designated work area location on RJ-45 modular jacks. These modul ar jack asse mblies shall snap into a modular mounting frame. The combined modular jack assembly is referred to as an information outlet.

2. The same o rientation and positioning of modular jacks shall be utilized throughout the installation. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall submit the proposed configuration for each information outlet type for review by the Engineer.

3. Information outlet faceplates shall incorporate recessed designation strips at the top and bottom of the frame fo r identifying lab els. Designation strips shall be fitted with cle ar plastic covers.

4. Where standalone CAT 6 only modular jacks are identified, the information outlet faceplate shall be configured as to allow for the addition of one (1) additional modular jack (CAT 3, CAT 5E, or CAT 6) to be installed to supplement each such modular jack as defined by this project. The installation of these supplemental modular jacks is NOT part of this project.

5. Any unused modular jack positions on an information outlet faceplate shall be fitted with a removable blank inserted into the opening.

6. The information outlet faceplate shall be constructed of high impact plastic (except where noted otherwise). The information outlet faceplate color shall (1 ) match the faceplate


color used for other utilities in the building or (2) when installed in surface raceway (if applicable), match the color of that raceway.

7. Different faceplate and frame designs for locations, which include optical fiber cabling relative to those, that te rminate only copper cabling are acceptable. Information outlets that incorporate optical fiber shall be compliant with the above requirements plus:

a. Be a low-profile assembly.

b. Incorporate a mechanism for storag e of cable and fiber slack needed for termination.

c. Position the optical fiber couplings to face downward or at a downward angle to prevent contamination.

d. Incorporate a shroud that protects the opti cal fiber couplings from impact damage.

8. All information outlets a nd the asso ciated modular jacks sh all be of the sam e manufacturer throughout the project.

9. The CAT 6 modular jacks shall be non-keyed 8-pin modular jacks.

10. The interface between the modular jack and the h orizontal cable shall be a 110-type termination block or insulation displacement type contact. Termination components shall be designed to maintain the hori zontal cable’s pair twists as closely as possible to the point of mechanical termination.

11. CAT 6 modular jacks shall be pinned per TIA-568B.

12. CAT 6 termination hardware shall, as a minimum, meet all of the mechanical and electrical performance requirements of the following standards:

a. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A-5 b. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568A c. ISO/IEC 11801 d. IEC 603-7 e. FCC PART 68 SUBPART F

13. The color fo r CAT 6 ja cks shall be white for voi ce applications and blue for data applications. Alternately, a color-coded bezel or icon may be used to identify the CAT 6 modular jack.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CABLE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Horizontal Cabling:

1. The maximum horizontal cable d rop length for Data UTP sha ll not exceed 295 feet (90 meters) in order to meet data communi cations performance specifications. This length is measured from the termination panel in the wiring closet to the outlet and must include any slack required for the installation and termination. The Contractor is responsible for installing horizontal cabling in a fashion so as to avoid unnecessarily long runs. Any area that cannot be reached within the above constraints should be identified


and reported to the Engin eer prior to insta llation. Changes to the contra ct documents shall be approved by the Engineer.

2. All cable shall be free of tension at both ends. In cases where the cable must bear some stress, Kellum grips may be used to spread the strain over a longer length of cable.

3. Manufacturer’s minimum bend radius specifications shall be observed in all instances.

4. Horizontal cabling installed as open cabling shall be supported at a maxim um of 5’ between supports. Refer to the specifications for required cable supports.

5. Horizontal cabling installed as open cable or in cable tray shall be bundled at not less than 10’ intervals with hook-and-loop tie wraps. The use of plastic cable ties is strictly prohibited.

6. The maximum conduit fill for horizontal cabling shall not exceed 40% regardless of conduit length.

7. Cable sheaths shall be protected from damage from sharp edges. Where a cable passes over a sharp edge, a bushing or grommet shall be used to protect the cable.

8. A coil of 3 f eet in ea ch cable shall b e placed in the ceiling at the last support (e.g., J-hook, bridle ring, etc.) before the cables enter a fishable wall, conduit, surface raceway or box. At any location where cables are installed into movable partition walls or modular furniture via a service pole, approximately 15-feet of slack shall be left in each horizontal cable under 250 feet in length to allow for change in the office layout without re-cabling. These "service loops" shall be secured at the last cable support before the cable leaves the ceiling and shall be coi led from 100% to 200% o f the cable recommended minimum bend radius.

9. To reduce or eliminate EMI, the follo wing minimum separation distances from 480V power lines shall be adhered to:

a. Twelve (12) inches from power lines of <5-kVa. b. Eighteen (18) inches from high-voltage lighting (including fluorescent). c. Thirty-nine (39) inches from power lines of 5-kVa or greater. d. Thirty-nine (39) inches from transformers and motors.

10. Information outlets shown on floor plans with the subscript “W” are intended to be used for wall mounted telephones. Back boxes for wall mounted telephones shall not b e located within 12” vertically, or horizontally, from any light switch es, power receptacles, nurse call devices, thermostats, or any other architectural element that would otherwise prevent the installation of a wall mounted telephone on the mating lugs.

B. Horizontal Cabling in Modular Furniture:

1. This Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing cable completely to the information outlet in the furniture. This Contractor’s responsibility does not end at the furniture feed point.

2. Where furniture panels are installed to include contact with a wall, cabling shall be fed to the furniture panels via conduit.

3. Where modular furniture is installed without wall contact, the Contractor shall install cabling through floor fittings as shown on the drawings.


4. Cabling shall be protected in the transit ion from the floor or wall fittings to the modula r furniture via a length of f lexible plastic conduit or other a pproved protective means. Conduit fittings shall be compatible with the Flo or and Wall Fittings proposed. The re shall be no exposed cable in the transiti on to the modular furniture. Fill ratio (cable area vs. conduit area) in each feed shall not exceed 40%.

5. For purposes of bidding, it is to be assumed that the cable pathway shall be limited to the bottom panel of the mo dular furniture only. Com munications cables would be run through these channels to the jack location.

6. For purposes of bidding, i t is to be assu med that i t will be the responsibilit y of the Contractor to punch and reinstall the bottom molding panels on the modular furniture as required to accomm odate the com munications cabling and information outlets. The panels shall be marked prior to installation by the Owner to identify the desired location of the information outlets.

7. The information outlet shall be secured to the panel via mounting tabs, pop-rivets, screws or other approved method. Use of adhesive tape is not accept able. The method of securing the information outlet to the panel shall not result in sharp protrusions (e.g., sheet metal screw tip) into the channel behind the panel.

3.2 CABLE TERMINATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Cable Terminations - Data UTP:

1. Modular patch panels shall be desi gned and in stalled in a fashi on as to allo w future horizontal cabling to b e terminated on the panel without disruption to existing connections.

2. If the “last” patch (per rack) is greater than 50% utilized, one additional patch panel shall be provided for future use.

3. At information outlets and modular p atch panels, the Contractor shall en sure that the twists in each cable pair are preserved to within 0.5-inch of th e termination for data cables. The cable jacket shall be removed only to the extent required to make the termination.

END OF SECTION

MORTON COLLEGE IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 17170 IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This section describes the execution and administration requirements relating to the structu red cabling system and its termination components and related subsystems.

B. Identification and labeling.


A. Section 17010 – Basic Communications Systems Requirements


A. Refer to section 17010 for relevant standards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Documentation of labeling scheme.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LABELING

A. Adhesive labels shall meet the requirements of UL 969 (Ref D-16) for legibility, defacement and adhesion. Exposure requirements of UL 969 for indoor and outdoor (as applicable) use shall be met.

B. Insert labels shall m eet the requirements of UL 969 for l egibility, defacement and general exposure.

C. Labeling shall be co nsistent for all co mmon elements in the p roject. This consistency shall include label size, color, typeface an attachment method.

D. Labels incorporating bar codes shall be either Code 39 conforming to USS-39 or Co de 128 conforming to USS-128.

1. All Code 39 bar codes shall have a ratio between 2.5:1 and 3.0:1. Provide a minimu m “quite zone” of 0.25” on each side of the bar code.

2. A descriptive label for rea ding by personnel shall be provided with any bar code. Bar codes by themselves are not acceptable.

E. Color Code: Observe the following requirements for color coding:

1. Labels on each end of a cable shall be the same color for each termination.


2. Labels for cross-connects shall b e two different colors at each termination fields, representative of the color of that field.

3. Orange (Pantone 15C) shall be used for the demarcation point.

4. Green (Pantone 353C) shall be used for the termination point of network connection on the facility side of the demarc.

5. Purple (Pantone 264C) shall be u sed to identify the termination of cables from common equipment (PBX, computers, LANS, etc.)

6. White shall be used to i dentify the first-level b ackbone termination in the main cross-connect.

7. Gray (Pantone 422C) shall be used to identify the second-level backbone termination in the main cross-connect.

8. Blue (Pantone 291C) shall be u sed to identify the termination of station cabling at the telecommunications closet and/or equipment room end of the cable.

9. Brown (Pantone 465C) shall be used to i dentify the termi nation of the inte rbuilding backbone cable terminations.

10. Yellow (Pantone 101C) shall be used to ide ntify the te rmination of auxiliary circuits, alarms, maintenance, security, etc.

11. Red (Pantone 184C) shall be used to identify the termination of key telephone systems.

12. In facilities that do not co ntain a main cross-connect, the color white may be used to identify second-level backbone terminations.

F. Tag all CAT 3, CAT 5E, CAT 6, and optical fi ber cables at both the Commu nications Equipment Room and the information outlets using the following alphanumeric labeling system:

1. (Room Number) - (Outlet Number) - (Jack Number) - (Use).

2. “Outlet Number” shall sta rt with 1 in each room, with additional outlets in each room numbered sequentially.

3. “Jack Number” shall start with 1 for the upper left jack i n each outlet, i ncreasing sequentially from left to right and top to bottom across the outlet face.

4. “Use” shall be designated by the following:

a. “V” for voice (RJ-45) b. “D” for data (RJ-45) c. “C” for video (coax) d. “M” for multimedia retrieval (coax) e. “S” for speaker (RCA)

5. Example #1: “106-1-1-V” indicates the top left voice jack in outlet #1 in Room 106.

6. Example #2: “109-3-4-D” indicates the bottom right data j ack (assuming a 4-port faceplate) in outlet #3 in Room 109.


2.2 DOCUMENTATION/AS-BUILTS/RECORDS

A. General:

1. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall subm it as-builts per th e requirements of Section 17010 and Di vision 1. Documentation shall include the items detailed in the subsections below.

2. All documentation, including hard copy and electronic forms shall become the property of the Owner.

B. Record Drawings:

1. The drawings are to in clude cable routes and outlet locations. Outlet locations shall be identified by their sequential number as defined elsewhere in this document. Numbering, icons and drawing conventions used shall b e consistent throughout all do cumentation provided.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING

A. Cable Labeling: Horizontal cables shall be labeled at each end.

1. Provide additional cable labeling at each manhole and pull box.

2. Cables that are routed through multiple pathway segments shall contain reference to all pathway segments in the pathway linkage field.

3. Cables that differ only by performance class shall have a suitable marking or label to indicate the higher performance class. Fo r example, station cabling utilizing the blu e color, may include blue with a white stripe to indicate the higher performance class station cabling.

B. Information Outlet Labeling: Tag all voice and data jacks as defined herein.

C. Termination Hardware Labeling:

1. An identifier shall be provided at each termination hardware location or its label.

D. Grounding/Bonding Labeling:

1. The TMGB shall be labeled “TMGB.” There shall be only one TMGB in the facility.

2. Label all TBB conductors connecting to the TMGB with a unique label, located at both ends of the TBB.

3. Each TGB shall be labeled with a unique label.

4. All TBB conductors connecting to the TGB shall be l abeled uniquely at each e nd of the cable.

END OF SECTION

MORTON COLLEGE TESTING Interior Renovations DKA Project No.: 13-004 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 17171 TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This section describes the testing requirements relating to the structured cabling system and its termination components and related subsystems.


A. Section 17010 – Basic Communications Systems Requirements


A. Refer to Section 17010 for relevant standards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Under the provisions of Section 1 7010 and Division 1, prior to the start of wo rk, the Contractor shall submit:

1. Complete information on testing procedure as described herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TESTING COPPER


1. The Contractor is responsible to perform acceptance tests as in dicated below for each sub-system (e.g., backbone, horizontal, etc.) as it is completed.

2. The Contractor is responsible for supplying all equipment and personnel necessary to conduct the acceptance tests. Prior to testing, the Contractor should provide a summary of the proposed test plan for each cable type including equipment to use used, setup, test frequencies or wavelengths, results format, etc. The method of testing shall be approved by the Engineer.

3. The Contractor shall visually inspect all cabling and termination points to ensure that they are complete and confo rm to the wiring pattern d efined herein. The Contra ctor shall provide the Engineer with a written certification that this inspection has been made.

4. The Contractor shall cond uct acceptance testing according to a schedule coordinated with the Owner/Engineer. Representatives of the Owner may be in attendance to witness the test procedures. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of one (1) week’s advance notice to the Engineer to allow for su ch participation. The notification shall inclu de a written description of the prop osed conduct of the tests, incl uding copies of blan k test result sheets to be used.

5. Tests related to connected equipment of others shall only be done with the permission and presence of the Contractor involve d. The Contractor shall ascertain that testing only is required to prove the wiring connections are correct.


6. The Contractor shall provide test results and describe the conduct of the tests including the date of the tests, the equipment used and the procedures followed. At the request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide copies of the original test results.

7. All cabling shall be 100% fault-free unless noted otherwise. If an y cable is found to be outside the specification defined herein, that cable and the associated termination(s) shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor. The applicable tests shall then be repeated.

8. Should it be found by the Engineer that the materials or any portion thereof furnished and installed under this Contract fail to comply with the spe cifications and drawings, with respect or regard to the quality, amount or value of materials, appliances or labor used in the work, it shall be rejected and replaced by the Contractor and all work disturbed by changes necessitated in consequence of said defects or imperfections shall be ma de good at the Contractor's expense.

a. CAT 6 Cable:

1) Testing shall be from th e modular jack at the info rmation outlet to the modular patch panel in the communication equipment room.

2) Horizontal cable shall be free of shorts within the pairs, and be verified for continuity, pair validity and polarity, and con ductor position on the modular jack (e.g., wire map). Any defective, split or mis-positioned pairs must be identified and corrected.

3) CAT 6 horizontal cable shall also be tested to 250 MHz as defined by TIA/EIA-568-C.2. Mea surements shall be of the "Basi c Link" including cabling and modular jacks at the information outlet and mo dular patch panel. Parameters to be tested must include:

a) Wire Map b) Length c) NEXT Loss (Pair-to-Pair) d) NEXT (Power Sum) e) ELFEXT (Pair-to-Pair) f) ELFEXT (Power Sum) g) Return Loss h) Attenuation i) Propagation Delay j) Delay Skew

4) The maximum length of horizontal cable shall not exceed 295 feet (90m), which allows 33 feet (10 m) for technology equipment and modular patch cords.

5) To establish testing baselines, cable samples of known length and of the cable type and lot installed shall be tested. The cable may be terminated with an eight-position CAT 6 modular connector (8-pin) to facilitate testing. Net Propagation Velocity (NPV) and nominal attenuation values shall be calculated based on this test and be utilized during the testing of the installed cable plant. This requirement can be waived if NPV data is available from the cable manufacturer for the exact cable type under test.


6) CAT 6 horizontal cable testing shall be performed using a test instrument designed for testing to 2 50 MHz or higher. Test records shall verify, “PASS” on each cable and dis play the specified parameters, comparing test values with stand ards based “te mplates” integral to the unit . Field testers that report a PASS*, FAIL*, or FAIL result for any of the parameters will not be accepted.

7) In the event results of the tests are not satisfactory, the Contractor shall make adjustments, replacement and changes as necessary and shall then repeat the te st or tests that disclosed faulty o r defective material, equipment or installation method, and shall make additional tests as the Engineer deems necessary at n o additional expense to the project or user agency.

2.2 DOCUMENTATION/AS-BUILTS/RECORDS

A. General:

1. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall subm it as-builts per th e requirements of Section 17010 and Di vision 1. Documentation shall include the items detailed in the subsections below.

2. All documentation, including hard copy and electronic forms shall become the property of the Owner.

3. The Engineer may requ est that a 10% random fi eld retest be conducted on the cabl e system at no additional cost to verify documented findings. Tests shall be a repe at of those defined above. If finding s contradict the documentation submitted by the Contractor, additional testing can be requested to th e extent dete rmined necessary by the Engineer, including a 100% rete st. This re test shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Copper Media Test Data:

1. Test results shall include a record of test frequencies, cable type, c onductor pair and cable (or Outlet) I.D., measu rement direction, test equipment type, model a nd serial number, date, reference setup, and crew member name(s).

2. Printouts generated for each cable by the wire test instrument shall be submitted as part of the documentation package. The Contractor shall furnish this information in electronic form (CD-ROM). The CD-ROM shall contain the electronic equivalent of the test results as defined by the bid sp ecification and be of a format re adable by Micro soft Word (Version 6.0 or newer). The Cont ractor shall provide a licen sed copy of the software required to view and print the d ata that is provided in a proprietary format. Th e Contractor shall furnish one (1) copy of the Data and Display (if applicable) software.

C. Record Drawings:

1. The drawings are to in clude cable routes and outlet locations. Outlet locations shall be identified by their sequential number as defined elsewhere in this document. Numbering, icons and drawing conventions used shall b e consistent throughout all do cumentation provided.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT APPLICABLE

END OF SECTION